3
HP Customer Care
Thank you for your purchase. Along with your product, you receive a variety of
support services from Hewlett-Packard and our support partners. These
services are designed to give you the results you need, quickly and
professionally.
Online Services:
For 24-hour access to information over your modem, we suggest these
services:
World Wide Web
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, plus product and support
information may be obtained from the following URLs:
KPꢀVJGꢀ7ꢁ5ꢁ
KPꢀ'WTQRG
JVVRꢂꢃꢃYYYꢁJRꢁEQO
JVVRꢂꢃꢃYYYꢄꢁJRꢁEQO
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites:
KPꢀ,CRCP
KPꢀ-QTGC
HVRꢂꢃꢃYYYꢁLRPꢁJRꢁEQOꢃFTKXGTUꢃ
JVVRꢂꢃꢃYYYꢁJRꢁEQꢁMT
KPꢀ6CKYCP
QTꢀVJGꢀNQECNꢀFTKXGTꢀYGDUKVG
JVVRꢂꢃꢃYYYꢁJRꢁEQOꢁVY
JVVRꢂꢃꢃYYYꢁFFUꢁEQOꢁVY
4
America Online
America Online/Bertelsmann is available in the U.S., France, Germany, and
U.K. Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and support documentation
to help answer your questions about HP products are available. Use Keyword
HP to start your tour or call 1-800-827-6364 preferred customer # 1118 to
subscribe. In Europe, call the appropriate number below:
#WUVTKCꢀ
(TCPEGꢀ
)GTOCP[ꢀ
5YKV\GTNCPF
7PKVGFꢀ-KPIFQO
ꢅꢄꢄꢄꢀꢆꢇꢀꢆꢇꢀꢈꢇꢆ
ꢉꢉꢊꢆꢊꢀꢋꢀꢌꢅꢈꢀꢍꢅꢀꢅꢅ
ꢅꢋꢇꢅꢀꢆꢊꢋꢀꢊꢋꢀꢎꢈ
ꢅꢇꢈꢇꢀꢇꢅꢀꢋꢅꢀꢋꢋ
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢀꢄꢌꢍꢀꢋꢄꢊꢈ
CompuServe
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and interactive sharing of
technical information with other members is available on CompuServe’s “HP
User’s forums” (GO HP), or call 1-800-524-3388 and ask for representative
#51 to subscribe. (CompuServe is also available in the U.K., France, Belgium,
Switzerland, Germany, and Austria.)
5
Obtaining software utilities and electronic information:
For U.S. and Canada:
Phone:
DGHQTGꢀꢄꢃꢋꢊꢃꢍꢍ
CUꢀQHꢀꢄꢃꢋꢊꢃꢍꢍ
ꢏꢇꢅꢆꢐꢀꢄꢆꢌꢑꢆꢆꢎꢆ
ꢏꢎꢎꢋꢐꢀꢄꢆꢌꢑꢆꢆꢎꢆ
Fax:
DGHQTGꢀꢄꢃꢋꢊꢃꢍꢍ
CUꢀQHꢀꢄꢃꢋꢊꢃꢍꢍ
ꢏꢇꢅꢆꢐꢀꢄꢆꢌꢑꢎꢍꢍꢆ
ꢏꢎꢎꢋꢐꢀꢄꢆꢌꢑꢎꢍꢍꢆ
Mail:
*2ꢀ&KUVTKDWVKQPꢀ%GPVGT
ꢄꢈꢌꢊꢅꢀ#XGꢁꢀ4QEMGHGNNGT
8CNGPEKCꢒꢀ%#ꢀꢍꢋꢊꢆꢆ
7ꢁ5ꢁ#ꢁ
For Asia-Pacific countries/regions:
Contact Mentor Media at (65) 740-4477 Kong SAR, Indonesia, Philippines,
Malaysia, or Singapore). For Korea, call (82) (2) 3270-0805 or
(82) (2) 3270-0893.
6
For Australia, New Zealand, and India:
For Australia and New Zealand, call (61) (2) 565-6099. For India, call
(91) (11) 682-6035.
For European English:
For U.K., call (44) (142) 986-5511. For Ireland and outside U.K., call
(44) (142) 986-5511.
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies:
Call (800) 538-8787 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3154 (Canada).
HP Support Assistant compact disc:
This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system designed
to provide technical and product information on HP products. To subscribe to
this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call (800) 457-1762. In Hong
Kong SAR, Indonesia, Malaysia, or Singapore, call Fulfill Plus at (65) 740-4477.
HP Service Information:
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3867
(Canada).
8
HP FIRST:
HP FIRST Fax will deliver detailed troubleshooting information on common
software and troubleshooting tips for your HP product. Call from any touch
tone phone and request up to three documents per call. These documents will
be sent to the fax of your choice.
North and Latin America
1WVUKFGꢀVJGꢀ7ꢁ5ꢁꢀCPFꢀ%CPCFC ꢏꢄꢅꢇꢐꢀꢊꢈꢈꢑꢈꢇꢅꢍ
7ꢁ5ꢁꢀCPFꢀ%CPCFC
ꢏꢇꢅꢅꢐꢀꢊꢊꢊꢀꢋꢍꢋꢌ
Asia-Pacific
#WUVTCNKC
%JKPC
Hong Kong SAR
+PFKC
+PFQPGUKC
,CRCP
-QTGC
/CNC[UKC
0GYꢀ<GCNCPF
2JKNKRRKPGU
5KPICRQTG
6JCKNCPF
ꢎꢋꢀꢊꢀꢍꢄꢌꢄꢀꢄꢎꢄꢌ
ꢇꢎꢀꢋꢅꢀꢎꢆꢅꢆꢀꢆꢄꢇꢅ
ꢇꢆꢀꢄꢀꢄꢆꢅꢎꢀꢄꢈꢄꢄ
ꢍꢋꢀꢋꢋꢀꢎꢇꢄꢀꢎꢅꢊꢋ
ꢄꢋꢀꢊꢆꢄꢀꢄꢅꢈꢈ
ꢇꢋꢀꢊꢀꢊꢊꢊꢆꢀꢇꢎꢄꢄ
ꢇꢄꢀꢅꢄꢀꢌꢎꢍꢀꢅꢆꢈꢊ
ꢅꢊꢀꢄꢍꢇꢀꢄꢈꢌꢇ
ꢎꢈꢀꢅꢍꢀꢊꢆꢎꢀꢎꢎꢈꢄ
ꢎꢆꢀꢄꢌꢆꢀꢌꢄꢆꢋ
ꢎꢆꢀꢄꢌꢆꢀꢌꢄꢆꢋ
ꢎꢎꢀꢅꢄꢀꢎꢎꢋꢀꢊꢆꢋꢋ
9
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
#WUVTKC
ꢅꢎꢎꢅꢑꢇꢄꢋꢇ
$GNIKWOꢂ
&WVEJ
(TGPEJ
&GPOCTM
'WTQRGCPꢀ+PVGTPCVKQPCN
(KPNCPF
(TCPEG
)GTOCP[
+VCN[
0GVJGTNCPFU
0QTYC[
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢀꢋꢀꢋꢍꢅꢎ
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢀꢋꢀꢌꢅꢈꢊ
ꢇꢅꢅꢑꢋꢅꢈꢆꢊ
ꢉꢊꢋꢀꢄꢅꢀꢎꢇꢋꢀꢆꢌꢍꢄ
ꢍꢇꢅꢅꢑꢋꢊꢋꢊꢈ
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢑꢍꢅꢆꢍꢅꢅ
ꢅꢋꢊꢅꢑꢇꢋꢅꢅꢎꢋ
ꢋꢎꢌꢇꢑꢆꢍꢅꢄꢅ
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢑꢅꢄꢄꢄꢈꢄꢅ
ꢇꢅꢅꢑꢋꢋꢊꢋꢍ
2QTVWICN
5RCKP
5YGFGP
ꢅꢆꢀꢅꢆꢀꢊꢋꢊꢊꢈꢄ
ꢍꢅꢅꢑꢍꢍꢊꢋꢄꢊ
ꢅꢄꢅꢑꢌꢍꢆꢌꢈꢊ
5YKV\GTNCPFꢂ
(TGPEJ
)GTOCP
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢑꢆꢆꢋꢆꢄꢎ
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢑꢆꢆꢋꢆꢄꢌ
ꢅꢇꢅꢅꢑꢍꢎꢅꢄꢌꢋ
7PKVGFꢀ-KPIFQO
10
Customer support options worldwide
The service and support chapter of this user guide contains worldwide sales
and service addresses and phone numbers for countries/regions not listed here.
Customer Support and Product Repair Assistance for
the U.S. and Canada
Refer to the service and support chapter of this user guide for additional
product repair information.
Call (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 10 pm, Saturday
9 am to 4 pm (Mountain Time) free of charge during the warranty period.
However, your standard long-distance phone charges still apply. Have your
system nearby and your serial number ready when calling.
If you know your printer needs repair, call (800) 243-9816 to locate your
nearest HP-Authorized service provider, or call (208) 323-2551 for HP
centralized service dispatch.
Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your product
questions. Call (900) 555-1500 ($2.50* per minute, U.S. only) or call
(800) 999-1148 ($25* per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S. and Canada) Monday
through Friday from 7 am to 6 pm and Saturday from 9 am to 3 pm (Mountain
Time). Charges begin only when you connect with a support technician.
*Prices subject to change.
11
European Customer Support Center Language and
In-Country/Region Options Available
Open Monday through Friday 8:30–18:00 CET
HP provides a free telephone support service during the warranty period. By
calling a telephone number listed below, you will be connected to a responsive
team waiting to help you. If you require support after your warranty has
expired, you can receive support for a fee through the same telephone
number. The fee is charged on a per-incident basis. When calling HP, have the
following information ready: product name and serial number, date of
purchase, and description of the problem.
'PINKUJ
+TGNCPFꢂꢀꢏꢊꢆꢊꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢎꢎꢄꢑꢆꢆꢄꢆ
7ꢁ-ꢁꢂꢀꢏꢈꢈꢐꢀꢏꢋꢌꢋꢐꢀꢆꢋꢄꢑꢆꢄꢅꢄ
+PVGTPCVKQPCNꢂꢀꢏꢈꢈꢐꢀꢏꢋꢌꢋꢐꢀꢆꢋꢄꢑꢆꢄꢅꢄ
$GNIKWOꢂꢀꢏꢊꢄꢐꢀꢏꢄꢐꢀꢎꢄꢎꢑꢇꢇꢅꢎ
ꢀꢏꢊꢋꢐꢀꢏꢄꢅꢐꢀꢎꢅꢎꢑꢇꢌꢆꢋ
(TCPEGꢂꢀꢏꢊꢊꢐꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢈꢊꢑꢎꢄꢑꢊꢈꢊꢈ
$GNIKWOꢂꢀꢏꢊꢄꢐꢀꢏꢄꢐꢀꢎꢄꢎꢑꢇꢇꢅꢌ
5YKV\GTNCPFꢂꢀꢏꢈꢋꢐꢀꢏꢇꢈꢐꢀꢇꢇꢅꢑꢋꢋꢋꢋ
)GTOCP[ꢂꢀꢏꢈꢍꢐꢀꢏꢋꢇꢅꢐꢀꢆꢄꢆꢑꢇꢋꢈꢊ
#WUVTKCꢂꢀꢏꢈꢊꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢅꢎꢎꢅꢑꢎꢊꢇꢎ
0QTYC[ꢂꢀꢏꢈꢌꢐꢀꢄꢄꢋꢋꢑꢎꢄꢍꢍ
&WVEJ
0GVJGTNCPFUꢂ
(TGPEJ
)GTOCP
0QTYGIKCP
&CPKUJ
(KPPKUJ
&GPOCTMꢂꢀꢏꢈꢆꢐꢀꢊꢍꢄꢍꢑꢈꢅꢍꢍ
(KPNCPFꢂꢀꢏꢊꢆꢇꢐꢀꢏꢍꢐꢀꢅꢄꢅꢊꢑꢈꢌꢄꢇꢇ
5YGFGPꢂꢀꢏꢈꢎꢐꢀꢏꢇꢐꢀꢎꢋꢍꢑꢄꢋꢌꢅ
5YGFKUJ
Continued on next page.
12
+VCNKCP
5RCPKUJ
2QTVWIWGUG
+VCN[ꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢐꢀꢏꢄꢐꢀꢄꢎꢈꢑꢋꢅꢊꢆꢅ
5RCKPꢂꢀꢏꢊꢈꢐꢀꢏꢍꢅꢐꢀꢄꢊꢄꢑꢋꢋꢄꢊ
2QTVWICNꢂꢀꢏꢊꢆꢋꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢈꢈꢋꢑꢌꢋꢍꢍ
In-country/region support numbers
If you require support after your warranty has expired, additional product
repair services, or if your country/region is not listed below, see “Worldwide
Sales and Service Offices” in chapter 6.
#TIGPVKPC
#WUVTCNKC
$TC\KN
ꢌꢇꢌꢑꢇꢅꢇꢅ
ꢏꢎꢋꢐꢀꢏꢊꢐꢀꢄꢌꢄꢑꢇꢅꢅꢅ
ꢅꢄꢄꢑꢇꢄꢍꢑꢎꢎꢋꢄ
%CPCFC
%JKPC
%JKNG
ꢏꢄꢅꢇꢐꢀꢊꢄꢊꢑꢄꢆꢆꢋ
ꢏꢇꢎꢐꢀꢏꢋꢅꢐꢀꢎꢆꢅꢆꢊꢇꢇꢇꢑꢆꢍꢆꢍ
ꢇꢅꢅꢑꢊꢎꢅꢍꢍꢍ
%\GEJꢀ4GRWDNKE
)TGGEG
*QPIꢀ-QPI
*WPICT[
+PFKC
ꢏꢈꢄꢐꢀꢏꢄꢐꢀꢈꢌꢋꢑꢌꢊꢄꢋ
ꢏꢊꢅꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢎꢇꢍꢑꢎꢈꢋꢋ
ꢏꢇꢆꢄꢐꢀꢇꢅꢅꢑꢍꢎꢑꢌꢌꢄꢍ
ꢏꢊꢎꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢊꢈꢊꢑꢅꢊꢋꢅ
ꢏꢍꢋꢐꢀꢏꢋꢋꢐꢀꢎꢇꢄꢑꢎꢅꢊꢆ
ꢏꢍꢋꢐꢀꢏꢋꢋꢐꢀꢎꢇꢄꢑꢎꢅꢎꢍ
ꢏꢎꢄꢐꢀꢏꢄꢋꢐꢀꢊꢆꢅꢑꢊꢈꢅꢇ
ꢏꢇꢄꢐꢀꢏꢄꢐꢀꢊꢄꢌꢅꢑꢅꢌꢅꢅꢀ
ꢏꢇꢄꢐꢀꢏꢅꢇꢅꢐꢀꢍꢍꢍꢑꢅꢌꢅꢅ
ꢏꢇꢋꢐꢀꢏꢊꢐꢀꢊꢊꢊꢆꢑꢇꢊꢊꢊ
ꢏꢎꢅꢐꢀꢏꢊꢐꢀꢄꢍꢆꢑꢄꢆꢎꢎ
+PFQPGUKC
-QTGC
-QTGCꢀQWVUKFGꢀ5GQWNꢀ
,CRCP
/CNC[UKC
Continued on next page.
13
/GZKEQꢀꢏ/GZKEQꢀ%KV[ꢐ
/GZKEQꢀ
ꢅꢋꢀꢇꢅꢅꢑꢄꢄꢋꢈꢌ
ꢏQWVUKFGꢀ/GZKEQ %KV[ꢐ
0GYꢀ<GCNCPF
2JKNKRRKPGU
2QNCPF
2QTVWICN
4WUUKC
5KPICRQTG
6CKYCP
6JCKNCPF
ꢅꢋꢀꢇꢅꢅꢑꢍꢅꢆꢄꢍ
ꢏꢎꢈꢐꢀꢏꢍꢐꢀꢊꢆꢎꢑꢎꢎꢈꢅ
ꢏꢎꢊꢐꢀꢏꢄꢐꢀꢇꢍꢈꢑꢋꢈꢆꢋ
ꢏꢈꢇꢐꢀꢏꢄꢄꢐꢀꢊꢌꢑꢆꢅꢎꢆ
ꢏꢊꢆꢋꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢊꢅꢋꢑꢌꢊꢊꢅ
ꢏꢌꢐꢀꢏꢍꢆꢐꢀꢍꢄꢊꢑꢆꢅꢅꢋ
ꢏꢎꢆꢐꢀꢄꢌꢄꢑꢆꢊꢅꢅ
ꢏꢇꢇꢎꢐꢀꢏꢅꢄꢐꢀꢌꢋꢌꢑꢅꢅꢆꢆꢀ
ꢉꢎꢎꢀꢏꢅꢐꢀꢄꢀꢎꢎꢋꢑꢈꢅꢋꢋ
ꢏꢍꢅꢐꢀꢏꢋꢐꢀꢄꢄꢈꢑꢆꢍꢄꢆ
6WTMG[
ꢀ
14
Contents
Introduction
Paper Handling LED Status
Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Printer Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Software for Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing Windows Printing Software
Navigation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Additional Features of Acrobat
Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tips for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
(CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Installing Network Software . . . . . . . . 66
Installing Macintosh Printing Software . 67
Software for Macintosh Computers . . . 76
Software for Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1 Printer Basics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Printer Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . 26
Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Printer Parts and Locations . . . . . . . . 32
Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Suggested Accessories . . . . . . . . . 34
Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Control Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Control Panel Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Control Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2 Printing Tasks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Selecting the Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Loading Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Loading Trays 2, 3, and the Optional
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Loading the Optional 2000-sheet
Input Tray (Tray 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
15
Selecting the Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Printing to the Standard Output Bin . . . 98
Printing to the Face-up Bin. . . . . . . . 100
Printing to a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Using the Stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Loading Staple Cartridges (5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler) . . . . . . . . . . 106
Stapling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional
Duplex Printing Accessory) . . . . . . . . . 110
Printing Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Feeding Envelopes Automatically
3 Advanced Printing Tasks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Using Features in the Printer Driver. . . . 135
Different First Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Printing Multiple Pages on One
Sheet of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Customizing Tray 1 Operation . . . . . . . 141
Tray 1 Mode=First . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tray 1 Mode=Cassette. . . . . . . . . 142
Manually Feeding Paper from Tray 1 . 143
Printing by Type and Size of Paper . . . . 144
Benefits of Printing by Type and
Size of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Changing the Variable Fuser Mode . . . . 146
Loading Custom-size Paper. . . . . . . . . 149
Quick Copying a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Printing Additional Copies of a
Quick Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Deleting a Stored Quick Copy Job. . . 152
Proofing and Holding a Job . . . . . . . . . 153
Printing the Remaining Copies of
(Optional Envelope Feeder) . . . . . 115
Inserting the Envelope Feeder . . . . . 117
Loading Envelopes into the Envelope
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Printing Envelopes from Tray 1 . . . . . 119
Printing Special Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Printing Letterhead, Preprinted
Paper, or Prepunched Paper . . . . 122
Printing Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Printing Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . 126
Custom-size Paper in Tray 1 . . . . . . 127
Printing Cards, Custom-size, and
a Held Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Deleting a Held Job . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Printing a Private Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Specifying a Private Job . . . . . . . 155
Releasing a Private Job . . . . . . . . 155
Deleting a Private Job . . . . . . . . . 156
Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
16
Storing a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Printing a Stored Job . . . . . . . . . . 157
Deleting a Stored Job . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Printing with the Optional HP Fast
InfraRed Connect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Setting Up to Print with
5 Problem Solving
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Clearing Jams from the Input Tray
Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clearing Jams from the Optional
Duplex Printing Accessory . . . . . . . . 187
Clearing Jams from the Top Cover
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Clearing Jams from the Output
Windows 3.1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Setting Up to Print with
Windows 9x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Printing a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Interrupting and Resuming Printing . . 163
Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Clearing Jams from the Stapler . . . . 194
Solving Repeated Paper Jams . . . . . 196
Understanding Printer Messages . . . . . 198
Using the Printer Online Help
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Correcting Output Quality Problems . . . 221
Correcting Wrinkles on
4 Printer Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Managing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . 165
HP Policy on Non-HP Toner
Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Toner Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . 165
Toner Cartridge Life Expectancy . . . . 166
Checking the Toner Level . . . . . . 166
Resetting the HP TonerGauge . . . . . 167
Continue Printing When Toner is
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Determining Printer Problems. . . . . . 227
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Software, Computer, and Printer
Interface Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Cabling Configurations . . . . . . . . . . 255
Selecting an alternate PPD . . . . . . . 269
Communicating with an Optional
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cleaning the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
HP JetDirect 600N Print Server . . . . 271
17
Checking the Printer’s Configuration . . . 277
Configuration Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
PCL or PS Font List . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
File Directory Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Event Log Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Appendix A Specifications
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Paper Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Supported Sizes of Paper for Input
and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Supported Types of Paper . . . . . . . . 335
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Card Stock and Heavy Paper . . . . . . 346
Printer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 348
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . 351
6 Service and Support
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty
statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Service During and After the
Warranty Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge
Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
HP Software License Terms. . . . . . . . . 292
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices. . . 295
Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Latin America and South America . . . 306
Asia and the Pacific . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Middle East and Africa . . . . . . . . . . 322
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Quick Copy Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Private/Stored Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . 357
Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Print Quality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Configuration of MBM Menu . . . . . . . . 383
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
EIO Menu (8100 N/8100 DN) . . . . . . . . 387
Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
18
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
Multibin Mailbox Commands . . . . . . . . 420
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Determining Memory Requirements. . . . 395
Installing Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Checking Memory Installation. . . . . . . . 400
Adjusting Memory Settings . . . . . . . . . 401
Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage . . . . 404
Appendix E Regulatory Information
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Environmental Product Stewardship . . . 426
Protecting the Environment . . . . . 426
Material Safety Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . 430
Environmental Conformity . . . . . . . . . . 431
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . 432
Safety Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Laser Safety Statement . . . . . . . . 436
Canadian DOC Regulations . . . . . 436
VCCI Statement (Japan) . . . . . . . 437
Korean EMI statement . . . . . . . . . . 438
Laser Statement for Finland . . . . . . . 439
Appendix D Printer Commands
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Understanding PCL Printer Command
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Combining Escape Sequences . . . . . 409
Entering Escape Characters. . . . . . . 410
Selecting PCL Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Common PCL Printer Commands . . . . . 412
Introduction
19
Introduction
This section explains some of the features of this online user guide as well as
tips and tricks to help you use it to its greatest potential. It provides an
overview of the following information:
z Navigation Features
z Text Conventions
z Additional Features of Acrobat Reader
z Tips for Use
toolbars.
Introduction
20
Navigation Features
Button
Button Name
Function
Page Up and Down
Arrows
The Page Up and Down arrows allow you to scroll
page-by-page through the online user guide. The
Page Up arrow allows you to go back one page,
while the Page Down arrow allows you to move
forward one page.
Table of Contents Icon
Introduction Icon
This Table of Contents Icon calls up the table of
contents for the online user guide.
The Introduction Icon calls up this introduction to
the guide.
Index Icon
The Index Icon calls up the online user guide text
index. The index entries are linked to their related
topics.
Introduction
21
Text Conventions
Some text is formatted differently to indicate specific meanings or functions.
Below is a table that defines the different text formats and what they indicate.
Text Format Style Meaning or Function
K
C
EY AP
This format is used to represent buttons on the printer, as well as
keys on the computer keyboard.
Hypertext
This format is used to indicate that the text is linked to another
page of the document. Clicking on the underlined text takes you to
that page. Sometimes, a page number and section heading are
included in the blue underlined text, but any text formatted this way
indicates the presence of a link.
DISPLAY PANEL
This format is used to indicate text that is displayed on the control
panel.
Input
This format indicates that the text is typed by the user at a
command prompt or into a dialog box.
Introduction
22
Additional Features of Acrobat Reader
In addition to the navigation buttons provided on the right side of the page,
Adobe Acrobat Reader has a number of other features that you may find
useful.
Button
Button Name
Actual Size
Function
This button sets the document view to the page’s actual
size.
Fit Page
This button changes the document view so the page fits
in the window.
Fit Visible Width
This button changes the document view so the visible
content and page width fit in the window.
Page Only
This button displays the page only with no bookmarks or
thumbnails.
Introduction
23
Button
Button Name
Function
Page With
Bookmarks
This button displays the page and bookmarks to the
different sections of the document in a window to the left
of the screen.
Page With
Thumbnails
This button displays the page and small images of each
page in a window to the left of the screen.
Back
This button allows you to go to the previous link or to
undo your last change.
Find
This button calls up the Find dialog.
Zoom
This button allows you to change the page size.
Introduction
24
Tips for Use
Use bookmarks to navigate between chapters.
When reading large amounts of text, turn off bookmarks and change the page
view to full screen.
Use the find function under the Tools menu to find specific terms.
To print this document - For best quality and quickest printing, always print
using a compatible PostScript Level 2 emulation printer driver.
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
25
Printer Basics
1
Overview
Congratulations on your purchase of an HP LaserJet printer. If you have not
done so, see the getting started guide provided with the printer for setup
instructions.
know the printer. This chapter introduces the following:
z Printer Information
z Accessories and Supplies
z Control Panel Layout
z Paper Handling LED Status Interpretation
z Printer Software
Overview
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
26
Printer Features and Benefits
Speed and Throughput
z RIP ONCE technology
z 32 pages per minute (ppm)
z 166 MHz MIPS microprocessor
Resolution
z 600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
z FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed
z More than 220 levels of gray
Memory
z 16 MB (8100/8100N) or 24 MB (8100DN) of RAM, expandable using
industry standard 100-pin DIMMs (Dual In-Line Memory Modules)
z Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) automatically compresses data to
use RAM more efficiently
Printer Features and Benefits
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
27
Language and Fonts
z HP PCL 6
z HP PCL 5e for compatibility
z Printer Job Language (PJL)
z Printer Management Language (PML)
z 45 scalable TrueType typefaces
z 65 fonts with HP FontSmart (not available for Macintosh)
z PostScript Level 2 Emulation standard
Printer Features and Benefits
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
28
Paper Handling Options
z Input
Š Tray 1: A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and
envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.
Š Trays 2 and 3: Two 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically sense
paper size.
Š Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5): Two 500-sheet trays.
These trays automatically sense paper size.
Š Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4): One 2000-sheet tray. This tray
automatically senses paper size.
Š Optional Duplex Printing Accessory: Provides two-sided printing (both
sides of paper).
Š Optional Envelope Feeder: Automatically feeds up to 10 envelopes.
Š Custom Paper Trays: Allows printing on custom-size paper. Holds up to
500 sheets of paper.
z Output
Š Standard Output Bin: Holds up to 500 sheets of paper. Automatically
senses when full.
Š Face-up Bin: Holds up to 125 sheets of paper. Provides the best results
when printing transparencies, labels, and envelopes.
Continued on next page.
Printer Features and Benefits
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
29
Š Optional 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler: Each of the 5 bins holds up to
250 sheets of paper. Provides job separation by stapling jobs.
Š Optional 8-bin Mailbox: Each of the 8 bins holds up to 250 sheets of
paper.
Š Optional 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox: Each of the 7 bins holds up to 120 sheets
of paper. Designed for tabletop printing. An optional stand is also
available to use with this mailbox.
Connectivity
z 3 EIO (enhanced input/output) slots
z HP JetDirect EIO cards, Ethernet (10Base-T, 10Base2), Local Talk, Token
Ring, Fast Ethernet 10/100Base-TX
z Parallel
z HP Fast InfraRed Connect (fast infrared connection)
Environmental Features
z EconoMode reduces toner consumption
z Power Save setting saves energy (meets ENERGY STAR guidelines)
z High content of recyclable components and materials in the printer
Printer Features and Benefits
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
30
Printer Information
Configurations
HP LaserJet 8100printer
The HP LaserJet8100printer (product number C4214A)
comes standard with 16 MB RAM, wide format printing,
two 500-sheet trays, and a 100-sheet multipurpose tray.
Note
The HP LaserJet 8100 requires an EIO card to
connect to a Macintosh.
HP LaserJet 8100 N printer
The HP LaserJet 8100 N printer (product number C4215A)
comes standard with 16 MB RAM, wide format printing,
two 500-sheet trays, a 100-sheet multipurpose tray, and
an HP JetDirect 600N print server.
Continued on next page.
Printer Information
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
31
HP LaserJet 8100 DN printer
The HP LaserJet 8100 DN printer (product number
C4216A) comes standard with 24 MB RAM, wide format
printing, two 500-sheet trays, a 100-sheet multipurpose
tray, an HP JetDirect 600N print server, and a duplexer
(for printing on both sides of paper).
Printer Information
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
34
Accessories and Supplies
You can increase the capabilities of the printer with optional accessories and
supplies.
Use accessories and supplies specifically designed for the printer to ensure
optimum performance.
The printer supports three enhanced input/output (EIO) cards. Other
accessories and options are available. For ordering information, see page 38.
Suggested Accessories
Custom Paper Tray
Printer Stand
2000-sheet Input Tray
(Tray 4)
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
Continued on next page.
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
36
Optional Hard Disk
The Hard Disk accessory can be used to permanently store downloaded fonts
and forms in the printer. Unlike standard printer memory, items on the Hard
Disk remain in the printer even when the printer is turned off. Fonts
downloaded to the Hard Disk are available to all users of the printer.
The Hard Disk can be write-protected through software for additional security.
Windows Users
Use HP LaserJet Resource Manager to delete files and manage fonts on a
mass storage device (page 73). For more information, see the printer software
help.
HP is constantly introducing new software tools for use with your printer and
accessories. These tools are available from the Internet free of charge. See
page 3 for how to visit the HP website for more information.
Continued on next page.
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
37
Macintosh Users
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to download fonts and files. See HP LaserJet
Utility on page 77 or the HP LaserJet Utility Guide online help included with
your HP LaserJet Utility software for more information.
Note
The HP LaserJet Utility is not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
38
Ordering Information
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. To order an
accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the
HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide.)
Ordering Information
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Paper
Handling
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Two 500-sheet trays and
feeder.
C4780A
C4781A
C3765B
2000-sheet Input Tray
Envelope Feeder
One 2000-sheet tray and
feeder.
Automatically feeds up to
10 envelopes.
Custom Paper Tray
Allows printing on custom-size C4184A
paper.
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
39
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Paper
Handling
Duplex Printing
Accessory (duplexer)
Allows automatic printing on C4782A
both sides of paper.
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
8-bin Mailbox
Each of the 7 output bins
holds 120 sheets of paper.
Designed for tabletop use.
C4783A
Each of the 8 output bins
holds 250 sheets of paper.
C4785A
C4787A
5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler
Each of the 5 output bins
holds 250 sheets of paper.
Provides job separation by
stapling jobs.
Printer Stands Printer Stand
Used in place of the
2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)
or the 2 x 500-sheet Tray
(Trays 4 and 5) when a
mailbox accessory is
attached.
C2975A
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
40
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Printer Stands Stand for 7-bin
Allows 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox C4784A
to be used when printer is
mounted on 2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray, 2000-sheet Input
Tray, or printer stand.
Tabletop Mailbox
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
41
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Printing
Supplies
HP Multipurpose
Paper
HP brand paper for a variety HPM1120
of uses (1 box of 10 reams,
500 sheets each). To order a
sample, in the U.S. call
(Other HP media is
available where office
products are sold.)
1-800-471-4701.
HP LaserJet Paper
Premium HP brand paper for
use with HP LaserJet printers
(1 box of 10 reams,
500 sheets each). To order a
sample, in the U.S. call
1-800-471-4701.
HPJ1124
(Other HP media is
available where office
products are sold.)
Toner Cartridge
(20,000 pages)
Replacement HP Microfine
toner cartridge.
C4182X
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
43
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Memory, Fonts, Dual In-line Memory
Boosts the ability of the printer
to handle large print jobs
(maximum 192 MB with
HP brand DIMMs):
and Mass
Storage
Module (DIMM)
(100-pin)
EDO DIMMs
(100-pin)
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
C4135A
C4136A
C4137A
SDRAM DIMMs
(100-pin)
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
C4140A
C4141A
C4142A
C4143A
C3913A
Flash DIMM
(100-pin)
Permanent storage for fonts
and forms:
2 MB
4 MB
C4286A
C4287A
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
44
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Memory, Fonts, Font DIMM
8 MB Asian ROM:
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
and Mass
Storage
(100-pin)
Hard Disk
C4292A
C4293A
Permanent storage for fonts
and forms. Enables RIP ONCE
mopying of print jobs that are
too large to RIP ONCE mopy
in RAM (see page 136).
C2985B
Cable and
Interface
Parallel Cables
3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
10 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2946A
C2947A
Accessories
Macintosh Network
Cable Kit
For PhoneNET or LocalTalk
connection.
92215N
(Requires EIO card,
J3111A)
1-to-1 connection (Macintosh 92215S
DIN-8 cable male-male).
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
45
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Cable and
Interface
Accessories
Enhanced I/O Cards
HP JetDirect print server
multi-protocol EIO network
cards:
Ethernet RJ-45 only
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC,
LocalTalk
J3110A
J3111A
Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9 J3112A
Fast Ethernet
10/100Base-TX RJ-45
only
J3113A
HP Fast InfraRed
Connect
Enables wireless printing
from any IRDA-compliant
portable device (such as a
laptop computer) to the
HP LaserJet 8100 N or
8100 DN printer.
C4103A
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
46
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Cable and
Interface
Accessories
Power Box
For connecting a multibin
mailbox to the printer when
the printer is on a printer
stand. This item is included
only with the 2000-sheet
Input Tray and the
C4789A
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray.
Maintenance
Accessory
Preventive Maintenance For 110V units
C3914A
C3915A
Kit
For 220V units
Documentation HP LaserJet Printer
Family Paper
A guide to using paper and
other print media with
HP LaserJet printers.
5040-9092
Specification Guide
PCL 5/PJL Technical
Reference
Documentation
Package
A guide to using printer
commands with HP LaserJet
printers.
5021-0377
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
47
Ordering Information (continued)
Order
Item
Description or Use
Number
Documentation HP LaserJet 8100,
8100 N, and 8100 DN
This is an online user guide
provided on compact disc.
C4214-60103
C4214-99001
Printers User Guide
User Documentation
Bundle
An additional copy of the
getting started guide and the
ready reference guide.
Accessories and Supplies
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
50
Control Panel Keys
Key
Function
G
z Places the printer either online or offline.
z Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer.
O
z Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears most printer
messages and places the printer online.
z Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message such as TRAY x
LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE]or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE.
z Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1 MODE=
CASSETTEhas been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control
panel.
z Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting paper from the
next available tray.
z Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control panel setting, first
press S
.)
ELECT
C
J
ANCEL OB
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. The time it takes to
cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only once.)
M
Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right end of the
button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward.
ENU
Control Panel Layout
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
51
Key
Function
I
Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of the
TEM
button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward.
The Item key is also used to navigate through the printer’s online Help
system (see page 199).
- V
S
+
Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press + to move
forward or - to move backward.
ALUE
z Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the
selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain when
the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory defaults from
the Resets Menu).
ELECT
z Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel.
Control Panel Layout
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
52
Control Panel Menus
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see page 354.
Press M for access to all control panel menus. When additional trays or
ENU
other accessories are installed in the printer, new menu items automatically
appear.
Continued on next page.
Control Panel Layout
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
53
To change a control panel setting:
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until the desired menu appears.
ENU
repeatedly until the desired item appears.
TEM
3 Press - V
+ repeatedly until the desired setting appears.
ALUE
4 Press S
to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next to the
ELECT
selection in the display, indicating that it is now the default.
5 Press G to exit the menu.
O
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel
settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
If you cannot access a menu or item, it is either not an option for the printer,
or your network administrator has locked the function. (The control panel
reads ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED.) See your network administrator.
To print a control panel menu map:
See page 281 for information on how to print a control panel menu map.
Control Panel Layout
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
54
Paper Handling LED Status Interpretation
Use the following table to interpret the status lights on the Optional 2000-sheet
Input Tray, the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5), the 8-bin
Mailbox, the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, and the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler.
Optional 2000-sheet Input
Tray and the Optional
2 x 500-sheet Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
8-bin Mailbox, 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox, and the 5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler
Light
Solid Green
The accessory is on and
ready.
The accessory is on and
ready.
Solid Amber
The accessory is experiencing The accessory is experiencing
a hardware malfunction.
a hardware malfunction.
Flashing Amber
The accessory has a paper
jam or a page needs to be
The accessory has a paper
jam or a page needs to be
removed from the tray, even if removed from the multibin
the page is not jammed.
mailbox, even if the page is not
jammed.
The lower right door might be
open.
The accessory is not correctly
attached to the printer.
Paper Handling LED Status Interpretation
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
55
Optional 2000-sheet Input
Tray and the Optional
2 x 500-sheet Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
8-bin Mailbox, 7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox, and the 5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler
Light
Off
The printer might be in Power The printer might be in Power
Save mode. Press G .
Save mode. Press G .
O
O
The accessory is not
The accessory is not
receiving power. Check the
power supply, power cables,
and C-link cables.
receiving power. Check the
power supply, power cables,
and C-link cables.
Paper Handling LED Status Interpretation
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
56
Printer Software
Windows
Client
Windows Software
Drivers
Network
HP Toolbox
HP FontSmart*
HP DocWise
HP JetSend
Administrator
Windows Software
HP JetAdmin
Drivers
HP FontSmart*
HP LaserJet
Resource Manager
Macintosh Software
Macintosh Software
Apple LaserWriter 8
Driver
PPDs
HP LaserJet Utility*
Fonts*
Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver
PPDs
HP LaserJet Utility*
Macintosh
Client
Desktop Printer Utility*
Guide files*
* These products are not supported in Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean, and Japanese.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
57
The printer drivers provided on the compact disc must be installed to take full
advantage of the printer’s features. The other software programs are
recommended, but are not required for operation. See the ReadMe file for
more information.
Note
Network Administrators: HP JetAdmin and HP LaserJet Resource Manager
should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer. Load all
other applicable software on the server and all client computers.
The most recent drivers, additional drivers, and other software are available
from the Internet. Depending on the configuration of Windows-driven
computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically
checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest software. If you do
not have access to the Internet, see the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide to obtain the most recent software.
Included with the printer is a compact disc containing the HP LaserJet Printing
System. On the compact disc are software components and drivers that
benefit end users and network administrators. See the ReadMe file for the
most current information.
The Printing System includes software designed for end users operating in the
following environments:
z Microsoft Windows 3.1x
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
58
z Microsoft Windows 9x
z Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
z IBM OS/2 version 2.0 or greater
z Apple Mac OS 7 or greater
Additional drivers for DOS WordPerfect 5.x and 6.x are available through your
HP distributor. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user
guide.)
The Printing System also includes software for network administrators using
the following network operating systems:
z Novell NetWare 3.x or 4.x
z Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
z IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 or greater
z Apple AppleTalk (LocalTalk or EtherTalk)
Network administration software for UNIX and other network operating
systems is available from the web or through your HP distributor. (See the
HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide.)
The drivers and software components for end users and administrators using
the environments listed above are described in the following sections.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
59
Printer Drivers
communicate with the printer (via a printer language).
Windows
See Access the Windows Printer Driver on page 68 for more specific driver
information.
Macintosh
See Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver on page 76 for more specific driver
information.
Note
Check the “Installation Notes” file provided on the compact disc for
additional software included and supported languages.
Certain printer features are available only from the PCL 6 driver. See the
printer software help for availability of features.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
60
Drivers Included with the Printer
The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most recent
drivers are available on the Internet. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the
front of this user guide.) Depending on the configuration of Windows
computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically
checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.
PCL 5e
PCL 6
PS1
9
9
9
9
Windows 3.1x
Windows 9x
9
9
Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh computer2
9
1PostScript Level 2 emulation is referred to as PS throughout this user guide.
2PPDs are included (see page 76).
Within the computer installation program, select Typical Install to install the
PCL 5e, PCL 6, and PS drivers and HP FontSmart. Select Custom Install to
install only the software you prefer, or if you are a network administrator.
Select Minimum Install to install only the PCL 6 driver for basic printing.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
61
Click Install to install the LaserWriter 8 driver, PPDs, PDFs, online help,
HP LaserJet utility, and Desktop Printer utility. Click Custom to only install the
software you prefer.
Additional Drivers
You can obtain the following printer drivers by downloading them from the
Internet or by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide.)
z OS/2 PCL/PCL 6 printer driver1
z OS/2 PS printer driver1
z WordPerfect 5.1 printer driver2
z AutoCAD (Rev. 14 compatible printer driver, also available on the compact
disc)
1The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They
are not available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, and
Japanese.
2DOS WordPerfect drivers are not available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
62
Note
If the desired printer driver is not on the compact disc or is not listed here,
check the software application’s installation disks or ReadMe files to see
if they include support for the printer. If not, contact the software
manufacturer or distributor and request a driver for the printer.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
63
Software for Windows
Use the Typical Install option or Custom Install option (if you are a Network
Administrator) to install the HP software. (This includes several printer drivers.
For more information, see page 60.)
Network Administrators: If the printer is attached to a network through an
HP JetDirect EIO card, before you can print, the printer must be configured for
that network. To configure the printer for your network, you can select Custom
Install from the printer installation program or use HP JetAdmin. (See the
HP JetAdmin manual or the getting started guide that came with your printer.)
Note
Network Administrators should use the Custom Install option. Custom
Install allows you to establish a connection to the printer and to install
administration software such as HP JetAdmin and HP LaserJet Resource
Manager.
Network Administrators: You can use the Disk Images option to create a set of
disks with the exact software you want the end users to use. This allows you to
distribute drivers without distributing administration software to end users.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
64
Installing Windows Printing Software (CD)
For Windows 9x and Windows NT 4.0
1 Close all running applications.
2 Insert the compact disc into the CD-ROM drive. (Depending on the
computer configuration, the installation program may automatically start.)
3 Click Start.
4 Click Run.
5 Type D:\SETUP (or the appropriate drive directory letter) in the command
line box and click OK.
6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
65
For Windows 3.1x
Note
Windows 3.1x includes only PostScript Level 2 Emulation (or Level 1
Emulation for Windows 3.1x) and FontSmart.
1 Close all running applications.
2 Insert the compact disc into the CD-ROM drive.
3 In the Windows Program Manager screen, click the File menu.
4 Click Run.
5 Type D:\SETUP (or the appropriate drive directory letter) in the command
line box and click OK.
6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
66
Installing Network Software
Note
If the printer is to be used on a network, install and configure the network
operating system software on the network administrator’s system before
individual users install the printing software.
1 Select a Custom Install to install the printing system software. Be sure to
install the HP JetAdmin software. The JetDirect Port can be installed and
configured during the custom installation.
2 Use HP JetAdmin to configure the HP JetDirect print server and the printer
for your network. You also can use HP Web JetAdmin to configure your
printer with your web browser. For information on using HP Web JetAdmin,
see HP’s web site at http://www.hp.com/net_printing/nps/
Note
For Asia, Web JetAdmin is only supported on Japanese systems.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
67
Installing Macintosh Printing Software
Note
Only the Macintosh drivers, installer, and PPDs are available in Traditional
Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
Note
Read the “Installation Notes” on the CD-ROM.
1 Quit all open applications.
2 Insert the compact disc into the CD-ROM drive.
3 Double-click the Installer icon and follow the instructions on the screen.
4 Open the Chooser from the Apple menu.
5 Click the Apple LaserWriter 8 icon. If the icon is not there, contact
HP Customer Care.
6 If you are on a network with multiple zones, select the zone in the AppleTalk
Zones box where the printer is located. If this is unknown, ask your network
administrator.
7 Select the desired printer name on the right side of the Chooser. An icon
should appear.
8 Close the Chooser by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
68
Access the Windows Printer Driver
To configure the driver once the software is installed, access it in one of the
following ways:
Temporarily Change Settings Change Default Settings
Operating System (from a software application)
(across all applications)
Windows 9x
From the File menu, click Print, Click the Start button, point to
and then click Properties. (The Settings, and then click Printers.
actual steps can vary; this is the Right-click the printer icon, and
most common method.) choose Properties.
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 3.1x
From the File menu, click Print, Click the Start button, point to
and then click Properties. (The Settings, and then click Printers.
actual steps can vary; this is the Right-click and choose Document
most common method.) Defaults or Properties.
From the File menu, click Print, From the Windows control
click Printers, and then click
Options. (The actual steps can
vary; this is the most common
method.)
panel, double-click Printers,
highlight the printer, and click
Setup.
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel
settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
69
Choose the Right Printer Driver for Your Needs
For Windows, choose a printer driver based on the way you use the printer.
z Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the printer’s features. Unless
backward compatibility with previous PCL drivers or older printers is
necessary, the PCL 6 driver is recommended.
z Use the PCL 5e driver if you want print results to look comparable to those
from older printers. Certain features are not available in this driver. (This
PCL 5e driver is not backward compatible with older printers.)
z Use the PS driver for compatibility with PostScript Level 2 needs. Certain
features are not available in this driver.
z The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
For the Macintosh, use the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver, which is a PS driver.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
70
Printer Driver Help
Each printer driver has help screens that can be activated either from the Help
button, the F1 key, or a question mark symbol in the upper right corner in the
printer driver (depending on the Windows operating system used). These help
screens give detailed information about the specific driver. Printer driver help
is separate from the software application help.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
71
HP ToolBox
HP ToolBox is enabled during a Custom Install and is not needed to print.
Access HP ToolBox from a printer icon on the Windows 9x and Windows NT
4.0 system tray on the Taskbar. HP ToolBox provides one-step access to the
current status of the printer and the jobs it is printing. A list of all available
features is as follows:
z printer status
z “How Do I...” help
z utilities
z job status
If you choose not to use HP ToolBox, it can be disabled. See the printer
software help.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
72
HP DocWise
HP DocWise is enabled during a Custom Install and is not needed to print.
HP DocWise provides automatic notification of when your print job is done
printing with a graphical reminder of which bin it is in. HP DocWise also
notifies you if any errors occur during the printing of your job, such as paper
out.
If you choose not to use HP DocWise, it can be disabled. See the printer’s
software help.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
73
HP FontSmart
Note
HP FontSmart is not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean, and Japanese.
Access HP FontSmart from the HP LaserJet folder or through HP ToolBox.
HP FontSmart is a font management utility (for Windows only) that does the
following:
z installs, uninstalls, and deletes fonts
z manages fonts inside a single window by allowing you to drag-and-drop
z provides 145 TrueType fonts
z provides an on-screen preview of all the fonts and prints samples of them
z provides web connectivity to FontSmart, an online resource for free fonts
and HP-specific font information
Note
With Windows 3.1x and Windows 9x, you can use HP LaserJet Resource
Manager to download fonts to a mass storage device. Types of fonts
supported are TrueType, PostScript Type 1, and PostScript Type 42
(TrueType fonts converted to PostScript format). To download Type 1 fonts,
Adobe Type Manager must be installed and turned on.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
74
HP JetSend Communications Technology
HP JetSend is a new technology from Hewlett-Packard that
allows devices to communicate with each other simply and
directly. HP JetSend is built into your printer, allowing it to
receive information from any JetSend-enabled sending device
anywhere on your network, whether it is in the same office or
at a remote location. When you use the HP Fast InfraRed
Connect accessory, your printer can also receive information from any
JetSend-enabled infrared device. Examples of JetSend sending devices
include PCs or laptops running JetSend software or scanners with JetSend
built in. JetSend uses simple IP addressing between networked devices and
“point and shoot” between infrared devices.
Note
HP JetSend is not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean, and Japanese.
Simply use the custom installer on the software compact disc or visit the
JetSend web site (www.jetsend.hp.com) to download the JetSend software.
You will then be able to exchange intra-company documents directly between
PCs and between PCs and any JetSend-enabled printer, without the problems
of incompatible software applications or versions. JetSend software will allow
your colleagues to create documents on their PCs and send copies directly to
this printer without any device-specific drivers or configuration difficulties.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
75
You can visit the JetSend web site to learn which other devices are available to
communicate easily and directly with your JetSend-enabled printer.
How the JetSend Communications Technology Works
Networked Devices
To use the JetSend capability between networked devices, print a
configuration page (see page 278) to find your JetSend IP address, and give
your address to anyone who wants to send information to your printer via
JetSend.
From a JetSend sending device, a person only needs to enter the printer’s IP
address and press “send.”
Infrared Devices
To use JetSend infrared capability, line up the infrared sensors between the
sending and receiving devices, and choose the “send” option on the sending
device.
The devices will automatically negotiate the best possible outcome because
they have JetSend in them.
Note
HP JetSend is not available for the Macintosh.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
76
Software for Macintosh Computers
Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver
The driver for the Apple LaserWriter 8 comes on the compact disc shipped with
the printer.
PostScript Printer Description Files (PPDs)
PPDs, in combination with the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver, access the printer
features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An
installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the
compact disc. Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver that comes with the
computer or is installed with the HP printer software compact disc.
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
77
HP LaserJet Utility
Note
The HP LaserJet Utility is not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
HP LaserJet Utility allows control of features that are not available in the
driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features from the
Macintosh computer easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the
following:
z Customize the printer’s control panel messages.
z Name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download files and
fonts, and change most of the printer settings.
z Set a password for the printer.
z From the computer, lock out functions on the printer’s control panel to
prevent unauthorized access. (See the printer software help.)
z Configure and set the printer for IP printing.
Fonts
Note
Fonts are not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean, and Japanese.
Eighty screen fonts are installed that correspond with the 80 PS fonts resident
in the printer.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
78
Software for Networks
HP Web JetAdmin (Windows)
This browser-based HP JetAdmin software can be installed on any supported
server platform. The following systems are supported:
z Microsoft Windows NT
z HP-UX*
z IBM OS/2*
z Sun Solaris*
*HP Web JetAdmin is not included on the compact disc with the printer, but is
available from the Internet. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the
HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide to obtain this software.
Note
For Asia, HP Web JetAdmin is only supported for Japanese systems with
Windows NT and Windows 9x.
Use HP Web JetAdmin to do the following:
z Install and configure printers that are connected to a network with an
HP JetDirect print server.
z Manage and troubleshoot network printers from any location.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
79
HP JetAdmin (Windows)
HP JetAdmin is primarily for users who cannot use Web JetAdmin due to the
lack of browser access or because none of the supported server platforms
exist on their network. HP JetAdmin should be installed only on the network
administrator’s computer. HP JetAdmin can be accessed by clicking the Start
button (point to Settings, and then click Control Panel) in Windows 9x and
Windows NT 4.0 or from the HP LaserJet program group folder. Use
HP JetAdmin to do the following:
z Install, configure, and manage printers that are connected to a network with
an HP JetDirect print server.
z Manage and troubleshoot network HP printers and print servers.
Note
Note
For Asia, HP Web JetAdmin is only supported for Japanese systems with
Windows NT and Windows 9x.
The HP JetAdmin software works on the following network systems:
HP JetAdmin is not installed by default.
z Microsoft Windows NT
z Microsoft Windows 9x
z Microsoft Windows 3.1x
Continued on next page.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
80
z Novell NetWare
z HP-UX*
z Solaris*
z SunOS*
z IBM OS/2*
z Mac OS (via the HP LaserJet Utility)
*The software for these systems is not included on the compact disc with the
printer, but is available from the Internet. If you do not have access to the
Internet, see the HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide to
obtain this software.
Note
Network Administrators: If the printer is attached to a network, before you
can print, the printer must be configured for that network using
HP JetAdmin or similar network software. (See the getting started guide.)
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
81
HP LaserJet Utility (Macintosh)
HP LaserJet utility allows control of features that are not available in the driver.
The illustrated screens make selecting printer features from the Macintosh
computer easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following:
z Customize the printer’s control panel messages.
z Name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download files and
fonts, and change most of the printer settings.
z Set a password for the printer.
z From the computer, lock out functions on the printer’s control panel to
prevent unauthorized access. (See the printer software help.)
See the LaserJet utility guide for more information.
Note
The HP LaserJet Utility is not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
Printer Software
Chapter 1
Printer Basics
82
HP LaserJet Resource Manager
The HP LaserJet Resource Manager should be installed only on the network
administrator’s computer. The HP LaserJet Resource Manager allows you to
control hard disk and flash memory features not found in the drivers.
Bidirectional communication is required.
Note
HP LaserJet Resource Manager is not available for the Macintosh.
Use the HP LaserJet Resource Manager to do the following:
z Initialize disk and flash memory.
z Download, delete, and manage fonts to disk and flash memory across
networks.
Š PostScript Type 1, PostScript Type 42 (True Type fonts converted to
PostScript format), TrueType, and PCL bitmap fonts.
To download Type 1 fonts, Adobe Type Manager must be loaded and turned
on.
Printer Software
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
84
Selecting the Input Tray
Loading Tray 1
1
2
CAUTION
To avoid a paper jam, never add or remove paper
from Tray 1 while the printer is printing.
To avoid damaging the printer, print labels and
transparencies only from Tray 1. Send them to
the Face-up Bin, and do not print them on both
sides.
When printing multiple transparencies, promptly
remove each transparency as soon as it emerges
from the printer (so the sheets do not stick
together).
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Pull out the tray extension, if needed, for the
paper size you are printing.
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
85
3 Slide the paper width guides to the
3
4
appropriate size marked on the tray.
4 Place paper into the tray without stacking it
above the paperfill mark.
Note
For single-sided printing, place paper into the
tray with side-to-be-printed up. The top of the
page (such as letterhead) should be toward the
rear of the printer. For two-sided printing, place
paper with the front side down. The top of the
letterhead should be toward the rear of the
printer. For prepunched paper, always load with
the holes toward the printer.
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
86
5
5 Paper loading differs by size:
a. Load Letter and ISO A4 with the longer
edge of the page leading into the printer.
b. Load envelopes, Executive, Legal, 11 x 17,
ISO A3, JIS B5, or JIS B4 with the short
edge of the page leading into the printer.
(For more information on paper
specifications, see page 330.)
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
87
6 Slide the paper into the printer until paper fits
squarely and firmly between the paper width
guides, without bending.
6
Note
Paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m²) should be
printed from Tray 1 to the Face-up Bin to avoid
curl. If you are having trouble printing on media
other than plain paper, see Changing the
Variable Fuser Mode on page 146.
If Tray 1 is in CASSETTEmode, the printer Attention
light will flash. Press - V
+ to change the size
ALUE
to match the paper size in Tray 1 and press
S
.
ELECT
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
88
Loading Trays 2, 3, and the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
1 Open the tray until it stops.
1
2 Turn the paper guide lock to the unlocked
position.
3 Slide the paper guide to the mark that
indicates the size of paper you are loading.
2
Continued on next page.
3
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
89
4 Turn the paper guide lock to the locked
4
5
6
position.
5 Adjust the left paper guide by pushing in,
then lifting up and out.
6 Position the guide over the appropriate lines
marked in the tray. Press the guide into the
rear slot and then lower down into the front
slot. Be sure the guide is not skewed.
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
90
7 Insert up to 500 sheets of paper into the tray.
Do not fill the input tray above the paper fill
marks on the guides.
7
Note
For single-sided printing, place the side-to-be-
printed facing down. For double-sided printing,
the front side should be facing up. For letter and
A4 paper only, the top of the letterhead should
be toward the rear of the tray.
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
91
8 Make sure that the paper size tab is set
8
correctly. Slide the tray back into the printer.
If you wish to select your paper by type rather
than tray (source), see page 144.
Adjust the paper stop guide on the Standard
Output Bin for paper sizes larger than Letter or
A4. See page 99.
Note
If paper curls or skews excessively during
printing, open the tray and turn the stack of
paper over. To avoid a paper jam, never open
the tray while it is in use.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
93
1 Slide Tray 4 open until it stops.
1
2
3
4
2 Pull the front guide out by the blue pin. Place
the guide into the slots in the top and bottom
of the input tray that correspond to the paper
size you are loading and push in the pin.
3 Repeat step 2 to adjust the back guide.
4 Repeat step 2 to adjust the left guide.
Note
To load 11 x 17 inch paper, move the left guide to
the back of the tray.
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
94
5 Load up to 2000 sheets of paper into the tray.
Do not allow paper to extend above the
paperfill mark on the sides.
5
a. Load Letter or A4 paper with the top of the
page toward the rear of Tray 4, side-to-be-
printed down (A) for single-sided printing.
For two sided printing, load front side up.
b. Load 11 x 17, Legal, A3, or JIS B4 paper
with top of the page toward the right of the
printer. For two sided printing, load front
side up (B).
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
95
6 Press down on all four corners of the paper
stack to ensure the paper rests flat in the tray,
without bending.
6
7
8
Note
Do not store paper in the free area on the left
side. Serious damage may occur to the unit.
7 Close Tray 4.
8 Make sure that the paper size tab is set
correctly.
Note
See Printing by Type and Size of Paper on
page 144 to set the type of paper you loaded in
the tray.
If using the Standard Output Bin, remember to
adjust the paper stop guide on the output bin.
See page 99.
Selecting the Input Tray
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
96
Selecting the Output Bin
The printer has several output locations: the Standard Output Bin, the Face-up
Bin, and the optional 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, the 8-bin Multibin Mailbox, and
the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler.
Standard Output Bin
Face-up Bin
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
98
Printing to the Standard Output Bin
The Standard Output Bin, located at the top of the printer, holds up to
500 sheets of paper in the correct order as they exit the printer. A sensor
causes the printer to stop when the paper bin is full. Printing continues when
you empty or reduce the amount of paper in the bin. The Standard Output Bin
is the factory default bin.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
99
Adjusting the Paper Stop
The paper stop, illustrated below, is located near the Standard Output Bin. It
can be adjusted to help paper lay flat as it exits the printer. The paper stop
does not have to be raised for Letter or A4 size paper. Note that the printer
jams if the paper stop is set to a smaller size of paper than is being printed.
1 Pull the left side of the paper stop up until the stop is in an upright position.
2 Slide the paper stop to the mark indicating the largest paper size to be
printed.
1
2
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
100
Printing to the Face-up Bin
The Face-up Bin, located on the upper left side of the printer, holds up to
125 sheets of paper face up as they exit the printer. This bin is mainly used for
special paper types, such as labels, envelopes, or transparencies, that cannot
tolerate the curved paper path of the Standard Output Bin. This output bin
does not sense when the bin is full.
You can select an output bin through your software application, printer driver,
or from the printer control panel.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
101
Printing to a Mailbox
The following Mailboxes are available for the printer:
z 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox (each bin holds up to 120 sheets of paper)
z 8-bin Mailbox (each bin holds up to 250 sheets of paper)
z 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (each bin holds up to 250 sheets of paper)
These mailboxes attach to the left side of the printer. They can work in one of
the following operating modes:
Operating Modes
Mailbox
Each bin can be addressed individually as the output destination
and can have a name assigned to it by the network or printer
administrator.
Collator
In this mode, the device automatically separates mopies. Each
mopy is delivered in consecutive bins, starting from the Face-up
Bin. In this case, one job contains several mopies.
Job Separation
Automatically separates incoming jobs, assigning a bin to each job,
which may include multiple copies. It uses all mailbox bins for this
purpose, but is seen in the printer software as one logical bin. If a
mailbox bin is full, the printer automatically sends the job to the
next available bin if selected in JetAdmin.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
102
Operating Modes (continued)
Stacking This mode stacks the printed output from the lowest bin to the top,
regardless of job boundaries. This mode of operation takes
advantage of the total capacity of the mailbox bins. The device is
seen by the software as one logical bin.
How to Configure the Operating Modes
The network or printer administrator chooses the mode of operation through
the control panel or through an HP network configuration utility, such as
HP JetAdmin or HP LaserJet Utility. You will need to set up your printer driver
to reflect the mode chosen by the administrator.
Bidirectional Environment
The printer automatically selects the mode established by the network
administrator.
Continued on next page.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
103
Nonbidirectional Environment
The driver setting must match the printer mailbox mode. The method for
changing the mode varies with driver and by operating system. See your
driver’s online help.
The printer control panel will display different messages depending on the
mailbox used and which mode you are using. See the printer software help for
more information.
Mailbox Mode
In Mailbox Mode, if the Then the physical location is:
Control Panel says:
5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler
OPTIONAL BIN 1
Face-up Bin
OPTIONAL BIN 2
Mailbox 1-5
through 6
OPTIONAL BIN 7
Stapler Bin
Face-up Bin
Mailbox 1-7
7-bin Tabletop Mailbox OPTIONAL BIN 1
OPTIONAL BIN 2
through 8
8-bin Mailbox
OPTIONAL BIN 1
Face-up Bin
Mailbox 1-8
OPTIONAL BIN 2
through 9
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
104
Job Separation, Collator, and Stacking Modes
In Job Separation, Collator,
and Stacking Modes, if the
Control Panel says:
Then the physical location is:
5-bin Mailbox with OPTIONAL BIN 1
Face-up Bin
Stapler
OPTIONAL BIN 2
OPTIONAL BIN 3
Mailbox 1-5
Stapler Bin
Face-up Bin
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox
OPTIONAL BIN 1
OPTIONAL BIN 2
OPTIONAL BIN 1
OPTIONAL BIN 2
Mailbox 1-7
Face-up Bin
Mailbox 1-8
8-bin Mailbox
Note
For the types of paper the printer supports, see page 330). Envelopes,
labels, and transparencies should only be sent to the Face-up Bin.
The stapler is located on the left side of the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler. The
stapler can staple jobs of 2 to 20 sheets. The stapler bin can hold a maximum
of 400 sheets, depending on job size and weight of the paper. Only jobs sent
to the stapler bin will be stapled.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
105
Selecting a Mailbox through the Software
You can select mailboxes through your software application, printer driver, or
from the printer control panel. Otherwise, follow the instructions below for
setting the overall default printer output bin selection. Where and how you
make selections depends on your software application or associated printer
driver. (Some options may only be available through the printer driver.)
Selecting Mailboxes from the Control Panel
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears.
ENU
repeatedly until PAPER DEST= STANDARD OUTBIN * appears.
TEM
3 Press + repeatedly until PAPER DEST= OPTIONAL BIN x appears. The x
represents a number that varies depending upon the mailbox selected and
the operating mode used. Your network administrator may have changed
these names.
4 Press S
to save your choice. An asterisk (*) appears next to your
ELECT
selection.
Selecting the Output Bin
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
106
Using the Stapler
Loading Staple Cartridges (5-bin Mailbox with Stapler)
1
1 Turn off the printer and remove the Face-up
Bin.
2 Open the stapler unit cover.
3 Squeeze the staple cartridge tabs together
and pull the empty staple cartridge out.
2
Continued on next page.
3
Using the Stapler
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
107
4 Remove the plastic shipping clip from the
new staple cartridge. Insert the new staple
cartridge so that it snaps into place.
4
5
5 Close the stapler unit cover, replace the
Face-up Bin, and turn the printer on.
Note
If the printer runs completely out of staples or a
staple jam requires that you remove all the
staples in the path, up to six copies may not be
stapled.
Using the Stapler
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
108
Stapling Documents
The stapler can staple documents of 2 to a maximum of 20 pages on 16 to
28 lb paper, Letter, and A4 size only. The stapler should not be set as the
default output bin. If your job is only one page or if it is greater than 20 pages,
the printer will print your job to the bin, but it will not be stapled. The stapler
bin can hold up to 350 stapled sheets. To have your job stapled, send it to
according to the mode you are using.
You can select the stapler through your software application or printer driver.
This is the recommended method for stapling. If you are unable to designate
the paper destination in your software or printer driver, follow the instructions
below for setting the overall default printer output bin selection. Where and
how you make selections depends on your software application or associated
printer driver. (Some options may only be available through the printer driver.
See page 59 for more information on accessing the printer driver.)
Using the Stapler
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
109
Selecting the Stapler from the Control Panel
If your software does not support stapling, set it using the directions below.
1 Press Menu repeatedly until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears.
2 Press Item repeatedly until PAPER DEST= STANDARD OUTBIN * appears.
3 Press + repeatedly until PAPER DEST= OPTIONAL BIN x appears. (See pages
103 and 104 to choose the appropriate bin according to the mode you are
using.) Your network administrator may have changed the name of this bin.
For example, it may be called STAPLER.
4 Press S
to save your choice. An asterisk (*) appears next to your
ELECT
selection.
Using the Stapler
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
110
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplex
Printing Accessory)
The printer can automatically print on both sides of paper with an optional
duplex printing accessory (duplexer). This is called duplexing.
Note
See the documentation included with the duplexer for complete installation
and setup instructions. Duplexing might require additional memory
(page 392).
Continued on next page.
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplex Printing Accessory)
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
111
Guidelines for Printing Both Sides of Paper
CAUTION
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or paper
heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2). Damage to the printer and paper jamming
might result.
z You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the duplexer.
(See the printer software help for details.)
z To print on both sides of paper, make the selection from the software or
printer driver. (See the printer software help.)
z If the printer driver does not have this option, change the Duplex setting
from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel to DUPLEX=ON.
Also in the Paper Handling Menu, set Binding to long edge or short edge.
(For more information, see page 114.)
Note
If a Custom Paper Tray is installed, you cannot print on both sides of
custom-size paper.
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplex Printing Accessory)
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
112
Paper Orientation for Printing Both Sides of Paper
The duplexer prints the second side of the paper first, so paper such as
letterhead and preprinted paper needs to be oriented as shown.
Tray 1
z Load letter and A4 paper with the front side down and the top, short edge
toward the rear of the printer.
z Load other sizes of paper with the front side down and the top, short edge
toward the printer.
Continued on next page.
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplex Printing Accessory)
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
113
All other trays
z Load letter and A4 paper with the front side up and the top, short edge
toward the rear of the tray.
z Load other sizes with the front side up and the top, short edge toward the
right of the tray.
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplex Printing Accessory)
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
114
Layout Options for Printing Both Sides of Paper
The four print orientation options are shown below. These options can be
selected from the printer driver or from the printer’s control panel (set BINDING
from the Paper Handling Menu and ORIENTATION from the Printing Menu).
Note
The terminology for the binding edge in the driver may be different.
1. Long-edge
portrait (default)
2. Long-edge
landscape
3. Short-edge
portrait
4. Short-edge
landscape
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplex Printing Accessory)
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
115
Printing Envelopes
Feeding Envelopes Automatically (Optional Envelope
Feeder)
With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed up to 10
envelopes. (For supported envelope sizes, see page 330.) To print envelopes
without an envelope feeder, see page 119.
Note
See the documentation included with the envelope feeder for complete
installation and setup instructions.
You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the envelope
feeder. See the printer software help for details.
Continued on next page.
Printing Envelopes
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
117
Inserting the Envelope Feeder
1
2
3
4
1 Open Tray 1 and remove the cover over the
opening for the envelope feeder.
2 Locate the pins on the envelope feeder and
the corresponding holes on the printer.
3 Align the envelope feeder with the
corresponding printer rails.
4 Slide the envelope feeder into the printer until
it locks into place.
Printing Envelopes
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
118
Loading Envelopes into the Envelope Feeder
1
Note
Print only envelopes approved for use in the
printer (page 343).
1 Pull out the envelope tray extender. The tray
2
extender will help reduce jams.
2 Adjust the width guides to the size of the
envelopes to be used.
3 Lift the envelope weight lever, and insert the
envelopes up to the fill mark.
4 Lower the lever. The envelopes should be
angled as shown (A). Do not angle them the
opposite direction (B).
Note
Select the envelope size from the software
application (if the setting is available), the printer
4
driver, or the Paper Handling Menu in the
printer’s control panel (page 360). To print by
type and size of paper, see page 144.
Printing Envelopes
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
119
Printing Envelopes from Tray 1
With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed up to
10 envelopes. To order an envelope feeder, see page 38. To print with the
envelope feeder, see page 115.
Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1. (Up to 10 can be stacked
in the tray.) Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope.
Always test a few sample envelopes before purchasing a large quantity.
Set margins at least 0.6 inch (15 mm) from the edge of the envelope.
WARNING!
CAUTION
Never use envelopes with coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or
other synthetic materials. These items can emit noxious fumes.
Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick
adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely damage the printer.
To avoid jamming and possible printer damage, never try to print on both
sides of an envelope.
Before you load envelopes, make sure they are flat and not damaged or
stuck together. Do not use envelopes with pressure-sensitive adhesive.
(For envelope specifications, see page 343.)
Printing Envelopes
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
120
Loading Envelopes in Tray 1
1
2
3
1 Open Tray 1.
2 If necessary, pull out the tray extension for
the envelope size you are printing.
3 Place up to ten envelopes between the paper
width guides, face up.
4 Slide the paper width guides until they lightly
touch both sides of the envelope stack
without bending it.
Note
Paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m²) should be
printed from Tray 1 to the Face-up Bin to avoid
curl.
If Tray 1 is in CASSETTE mode, the printer
Attention light will flash. Press - V
+ to
ALUE
change the size to match the paper size in
Tray 1, and press S
.
ELECT
4
Printing Envelopes
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
121
Printing Envelopes from Your Software Application
1 Load up to ten envelopes into Tray 1.
2 Specify Tray 1, Automatic, or select the paper source by type in your
software application, and set the envelope size and type to the appropriate
envelope size (page 343).
3 If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify
Landscape for page orientation in your application.
CAUTION
To avoid a printer jam, do not remove or insert an envelope once you begin
printing.
For best print quality, use the table on page 345 to set margins for a return and
mailing address. It gives you typical address margins for a Commercial #10 or
DL envelope. Avoid printing over the area where an envelope’s three back
flaps meet.
Note
If you print on an envelope and send it to a mailbox, the envelope will go
to the mailbox Face-up Bin.
Printing Envelopes
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
122
Printing Special Paper
Printing Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, or Prepunched
Paper
Special paper includes letterhead, envelopes, labels, transparencies, full-
bleed images, rotated paper, postcards, custom-size, and heavy paper.
When printing letterhead or preprinted paper, it is important to load the trays
with the correct orientation.
When printing with prepunched paper, always load the paper with the holes
toward the printer. When printing on both sides of prepunched paper, you must
select prepunched paper as the paper type in the Paper Handling menu from
the control panel and select prepunched paper from your printer driver.
Note
When printing prepunched paper with stapling enabled, the staple will be
in the lower right corner of your print job.
Continued on next page.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
123
Note
Paper orientation can differ when you print with an optional duplexer
(page 112).
Printing in portrait or landscape mode is usually selected from the software
application or printer driver. If the option is not available, change the
Orientation setting from the Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel
(page 369).
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
124
Printing Labels
Use only labels recommended for use in laser printers. Make sure that labels
meet the specifications for the input tray you use (page 341).
Do:
z Print a stack of 50 labels from Tray 1.
z Load labels with the side-to-be-printed facing up and the top, short edge
toward the back, if they are letter or A4 size. For other sizes, load labels
with the short edge toward the printer.
z Use the Face-up Bin for printing labels.
Continued on next page.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
Do not:
125
CAUTION
Failure to follow these instructions can damage the printer.
z Load the trays to capacity because labels are heavier than paper.
z Use labels that are separating from the backing sheet, wrinkled, or
damaged in any way.
z Use labels that have the backing sheet exposed. (Labels must cover the
entire backing sheet with no exposed spaces.)
z Feed a sheet of labels through the printer more than once. The adhesive
backing is designed for only one pass through the printer.
z Print on both sides of labels.
z Send labels to a mailbox.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
126
Printing Transparencies
Overhead transparencies used in HP LaserJet printers must be able to
withstand the 392° F (200° C) temperature encountered in the printer’s fusing
process.
Use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. Because
transparencies tend to stick to each other, remove each transparency from the
output bin before printing the next one.
Use the Face-up Bin for printing transparencies.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
127
Custom-size Paper in Tray 1
You can print on custom-size paper from
Tray 1. For paper specifications, see
page 330.
Printing on the Smallest-
Sized Paper
If you are using the printer driver to set the
paper size, under the Custom button, select
the paper tab and set the paper size.
1 In your software application, select
Tray 1 for the paper source and select
either Custom or the name assigned to
the custom-size paper in the driver for
the paper size.
1
Paper Source:
TRAY 1
Custom
Paper Size:
Continued on next page.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
128
2 Print custom-size paper from Tray 1. See
2
3
Loading Tray 1 on page 84.
3 The edge of the paper feeding into the printer
must be at least 3.9 inches (98 mm) wide to
allow rollers inside the printer to grab the
paper. Measuring from the leading edge to
the trailing edge of the paper, the length must
be at least 7.5 inches (190 mm).
Note
For more information on paper specifications,
see page 330.
Printing Bleeds
Since the printer has the ability to print on
specially cut paper up to 11.7 x 17.7 inches
(297 x 450 mm), you can print up to 11 x 17
inches (279 x 432 mm) bleed images with crop
marks. See your software application or online
help.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
129
Printing Cards, Custom-size, and Heavy Paper
Custom-size paper can be printed from Tray 1. For paper specifications, see
Paper Specifications starting on page 328.
Note
The printer’s control panel can be set for one custom size at a time. Do not
load more than one size of custom paper into the printer.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
130
Guidelines for Printing Custom-size Paper
z Do not attempt to print on paper smaller than 3.9 inches (98 mm) wide or
7.5 inches (191 mm) long.
z Set page margins at least .17 inch (4 mm) away from the edges.
Setting Custom Paper Sizes
When custom paper is loaded, size settings need to be selected from the
software application (the preferred method), the printer driver, or from the
printer’s control panel. The size settings defined for custom-size paper applies
to all custom paper trays installed on the printer.
Note
Only one custom paper size can be saved in the printer. Settings in the
printer driver and software application override control panel settings.
(Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
Continued on next page.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
131
X (front edge)
7.5 in. (191 mm)
Y (side edge)
If the settings are not available from the software, set the custom paper size
from the control panel:
1 From the Printing Menu set CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES.
2 From the Printing Menu, select inches or millimeters as the unit of
measurement.
3 From the Printing Menu, set the X dimension (the front edge of the paper)
as shown in the illustration above. X can be from 3.9 to 11.7 inches (from
98 to 297 mm) for Tray 1. Set the Y dimension (the side edge of the paper)
as shown in the illustration above. Y can be from 7.5 to 17.7 inches (from
191 to 450 mm) for Tray 1.
Continued on next page.
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 2
Printing Tasks
132
4 If custom paper is loaded into Tray 1 and TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE, then set
TRAY 1 SIZE=CUSTOM from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control
panel. See Customizing Tray 1 Operation on page 141.
5 In the software, select Custom or the name assigned to the custom-size
paper in the driver as the paper size.
For example, if the custom paper is 8 x 10 inches (203 x 254 mm), set X=8
inches and Y=10 inches (X=203 millimeters and Y=254 millimeters).
Printing Special Paper
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
133
Advanced Printing Tasks
3
Overview
This chapter introduces some advanced printing tasks to help you take full
advantage of the printer’s features. These tasks are “advanced” because they
require you to change settings from a software application, the printer driver,
or the printer’s control panel.
z Using Features in the Printer Driver
z Customizing Tray 1 Operation
z Changing the Variable Fuser Mode
z Loading Custom-size Paper
z Quick Copying a Job
z Proofing and Holding a Job
z Printing a Private Job
Continued on next page.
Overview
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
134
z Storing a Print Job
z Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Connect
Note
Only use PCL 5e for backward compatibility. Most of the features in this
section do not apply to PCL 5e. We recommend the use of PCL 6 or PS to
take best advantage of the features in this
printer.
Not all features are compatible with all drivers.
Overview
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
135
Using Features in the Printer Driver
When you print from a software application, many of the printer’s features are
available from the printer driver. To access Windows printer drivers, see
page 68.
Note
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, PS, and Macintosh drivers are slightly different. Check
the drivers for available options. The PCL 6 driver takes full advantage of
the printer’s features.
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel
settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
Printer Collation
The Printer Collation feature allows multiple original prints (mopying) that
provides you the following advantages:
z Reduces network traffic
z Faster return to application
z All documents are original
Continued on next page.
Using Features in the Printer Driver
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
136
RIP ONCE
RIP ONCE allows the print job to be processed one time at the printer. The
formatted print job can then be printed multiple times without pausing to
process the print job again. This feature is normally active.
Saving Printer Setup Information
Printer drivers allow you to save the printer settings you use most often as the
default settings. For example, the driver might be set to print on letter size
paper, portrait orientation, with automatic tray selection (from the first
available tray).
PCL 6 printer drivers will allow you to save printer settings for multiple kinds of
print jobs. For example, you might want to create a Quick Set for envelopes or
for printing the first page of a document on letterhead.
New Printer Driver Features
Look for Quick Sets, Scale to Fit (any page size to any page size), and Booklet
Printing options in the Windows PCL 6 printer driver, or see the printer driver
help for more information.
Continued on next page.
Using Features in the Printer Driver
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
137
Printing with a Watermark
A watermark is a notice, such as “Top Secret,” printed in the background of
each page in a document. Check the driver for available options.
For Macintosh, you can select “Custom” and specify any text you choose.
Using Features in the Printer Driver
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
138
Different First Page
1 For Windows, select “Use different paper for
1
first page” in your printer driver. Choose
Tray 1 (or Manual Feed) for the first page and
one of the other trays for the remaining
pages. Place the paper for the first page in
Tray 1. (For manual feed, place paper in
Tray 1 after the job is sent to the printer and
the printer requests paper.) Place the paper
with the side-to-be-printed up, the top of the
page facing the rear of the printer, and the
long edge leading into the printer.
For Macintosh, select “First from” and
“Remaining from” in the print dialog box.
Note
Where and how you make selections depends on
your software application or associated printer
driver. (Some options may only be available
through the printer driver.)
Different First Page
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
140
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature is
available in some printer drivers and provides a cost-effective way to print draft
pages.
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a Layout or Pages
Per Sheet option in the printer driver. (This is sometimes called 2-up, 4-up, or
n-up printing.)
Different First Page
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
141
Customizing Tray 1 Operation
Customize Tray 1 to fit your printing needs.
The printer can be set to print from Tray 1 as long as it is loaded or to print
only from Tray 1 if the type of paper loaded is specifically requested. Set TRAY
1 MODE=FIRST or TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling Menu in the
printer’s control panel. (Print speed might be slightly slower when printing from
Tray 1 when TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST.)
Tray 1 Mode=First
If you do not keep paper in Tray 1 all the time or you use Tray 1 only for
manually feeding paper, keep the default setting TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST in the
Paper Handling Menu.
z TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST means that the printer usually pulls paper from Tray 1
first unless it is empty or closed.
z You can still choose paper from other trays by specifically choosing another
tray in the printer driver or from your software application.
Customizing Tray 1 Operation
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
142
Tray 1 Mode=Cassette
TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE means the printer treats Tray 1 like the internal trays.
starting from the bottom tray upward (from the tray with the highest capacity to
the tray with the least capacity) or the tray that matches type or size settings
selected from the software.
z When TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE is set, an option appears in the Paper
Handling Menu to configure size as well as type settings for Tray 1.
z Through the printer driver or from within your software application, you can
select paper from any tray (including Tray 1) by type, size, or source. To
print by type and size of paper, see page 144.
Customizing Tray 1 Operation
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
143
Manually Feeding Paper from Tray 1
The Manual Feed feature allows you to print on special paper from Tray 1,
such as envelopes or letterhead. If Manual Feed is selected, the printer will
print only from Tray 1.
Select Manual Feed through the software or printer driver. Manual Feed can
also be enabled from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel.
Note
When Manual Feed is selected, if TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST the printer
automatically prints (if paper is in the tray). If TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE the
printer prompts to load Tray 1 whether or not Tray 1 is loaded. This enables
you to load different paper if necessary. Press G to print from Tray 1.
O
Customizing Tray 1 Operation
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
144
Printing by Type and Size of Paper
You can configure the printer to select paper by type (such as plain or
letterhead) and size (such as letter or A4), as opposed to source (a paper
tray).
Benefits of Printing by Type and Size of Paper
If you frequently use several different kinds of paper, once trays are set up
correctly, you do not have to check which paper is loaded in each tray before
you print. This is especially helpful when the printer is shared and more than
one person loads or removes paper.
Printing by type and size of paper is a way to be sure that print jobs always
print on the desired paper. (Some printers have a feature that “locks out” trays
to prevent printing on the wrong paper. Printing by type and size of paper
eliminates the need to lock out trays.)
To print by type and size of paper, do the following:
1 Be sure to adjust and load the trays correctly. (See the sections on loading
paper, starting on page 84.)
Continued on next page.
Printing by Type and Size of Paper
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
145
2 From the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel, select the
paper type for each tray. If you are unsure what type you are loading (such
as bond or recycled), check the label on the package of paper. For
supported types, see page 335.
3 Select the paper size settings from the control panel.
Š Tray 1: If the printer has been set to TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the
Paper Handling Menu, also set the paper size from the Paper Handling
Menu. If custom paper is loaded, set the size of custom paper from the
Printing Menu to match the paper loaded in Tray 1. To print custom-size
paper, see page 127.
Š Other trays: Paper size settings are adjusted when paper is properly
loaded into the printer. (See the sections on loading paper, starting on
page 84.)
4 From the software or printer driver, select the desired type and size of
paper.
Note
The type and size settings can also be configured from HP JetAdmin for
networked printers. See the printer software help.
To print by type and size, it might be necessary to unload or close Tray 1
or set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTEfrom the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s
control panel. For more information, see page 360.
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control panel
settings. (Software application settings override printer driver settings.)
Printing by Type and Size of Paper
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
146
Changing the Variable Fuser Mode
The variable fuser mode specifies the temperature and printing speed for a
specific type of paper. The user can change the variable fuser mode to
improve the print quality for paper that is having problems (such as heavy,
light, or rough media) even though the paper technically meets the
specifications provided on page 330.
The variable fuser mode is associated with the paper type. To use one of the
variable fuser modes, the paper type the user specifies in the driver for the job
must be one of the following:
z plain
z bond
z preprinted
z letterhead
z transparencies
z prepunched
z labels
z recycled
z color
z cardstock
z rough
Continued on next page.
Changing the Variable Fuser Mode
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
147
The user can change the variable fuser mode for each of these types of paper
from the control panel. The following are the variable fuser modes:
Variable Fuser Mode
Temperature and Printing Speed for Letter and A4
Normal fuser temperature setting, 32 ppm
Low fuser temperature setting, 32 ppm
NORMAL
LOW
HIGH1
HIGH2
HIGH3
Raises fuser temperature setting, 32 ppm
Raises fuser temperature setting, 24 ppm
Raises fuser temperature setting, 16 ppm
Most paper types are set to NORMAL by default. The exceptions are:
z TRNSPRNCY=LOW
z LABELS=HIGH1
z CARDSTOCK=HIGH2
z ROUGH=HIGH1
Changing the Variable Fuser Mode
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
148
To change the variable fuser mode for a paper type from the control panel:
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears.
ENU
repeatedly until CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENU=NO appears.
+ until YES appears.
TEM
3 Press - V
ALUE
4 Press S
to select the option.
ELECT
5 Press I
repeatedly until the desired paper type appears.
+ repeatedly until the desired variable fuser mode appears.
TEM
6 Press - V
7 Press S
ALUE
to select the variable fuser mode.
ELECT
8 Press G to exit the menu.
O
CAUTION
If you change the variable fuser mode to HIGH1, HIGH2, or HIGH3, be sure to
change the variable fuser mode back to the default when you are done
printing.
Changing the Variable Fuser Mode
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
149
Loading Custom-size Paper
Custom-size paper can be loaded into Tray 1 and, with the optional Custom
Paper Tray accessories, into Trays 3 and 5. However, only one custom paper
size can be defined in the control panel. This means that you can have several
Custom Paper Trays, but you must put the same custom-size paper in all of
them.
When custom-size paper is loaded into Tray 1, the printer prints at a slower
speed because it picks up paper based on the maximum size of paper the
printer supports. When custom-size paper is loaded in Trays 3 and 5, the
printer prints at normal speed because it picks up paper based on the size
defined in the control panel.
If a Custom Paper Tray is installed, you cannot print on both sides of custom-
size paper.
1 Load the custom-size paper in Tray 1, 3, or 5. See Loading Tray 1 on
page 84 and Loading Trays 2, 3, and the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5) on page 88 for instructions.
2 On the control panel, press M
repeatedly until PRINTING MENU appears.
ENU
3 Press I
repeatedly until CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=NOappears.
+ until YES appears.
TEM
4 Press - V
ALUE
5 Press S
to save the selection.
ELECT
Continued on next page.
Loading Custom-size Paper
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
150
6 To select the unit of measure:
a. Press I
until UNIT OF MEASURE appears.
TEM
b. Press - V
c. Press S
+ repeatedly until the desired unit of measure appears.
ALUE
to save the selection.
ELECT
7 To select the X dimension (see page 130 for more information about the
X dimension):
a. Press I
until X DIMENSION appears.
TEM
b. Press - V
c. Press S
+ repeatedly until the desired size appears.
ALUE
to save the selection.
ELECT
8 To select the Y dimension (see page 130 for more information about the
Y dimension):
a. Press I
until Y DIMENSION appears.
TEM
b. Press - V
c. Press S
+ repeatedly until the desired size appears.
ALUE
to save the selection.
ELECT
9 Press G to exit the menu.
O
Loading Custom-size Paper
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
151
Quick Copying a Job
The quick copy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and
stores a copy of the job on the printer’s hard disk. Additional copies of the job
can be printed later. This feature is the default for every job. This feature can
be turned off from the driver. For more information about specifying the
number of quick copy jobs that can be stored, see the QUICK COPY JOBS control
panel item described on page 382.
Printing Additional Copies of a Quick Copy Job
To print additional copies of a job stored on the printer’s hard disk from the
control panel:
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
ENU
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
4 Press - V
5 Press S
to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
ELECT
+ until the desired number of copies appears.
ALUE
to print the job.
ELECT
Quick Copying a Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
152
Deleting a Stored Quick Copy Job
When a user sends a quick copy job, the printer overwrites any previous jobs
with the same name. If there is not a quick copy job already stored under the
job name and the printer needs additional space, the printer may delete other
stored quick copy jobs starting with the oldest job. The default number of quick
copy jobs that can be stored is 32. The number of quick copy jobs that can be
stored is set from the control panel (see page 375).
Note
If you turn the printer off and then back on, all quick copy, proof and hold,
and private jobs are deleted.
A stored quick copy job can also be deleted from the control panel or from
HP Web JetAdmin.
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
ENU
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
4 Press - V
5 Press S
to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
ELECT
until DELETE appears.
ALUE
to delete the job.
ELECT
Quick Copying a Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
153
Proofing and Holding a Job
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof
one copy of a job and then print the additional copies.
To permanently store the job and prevent the printer from deleting it when
space is needed for something else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.
Printing the Remaining Copies of a Held Job
The user can print the remaining copies of a job held on the printer’s hard disk
from the control panel.
1 Press M
repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
ENU
2 Press I
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
4 Press - V
5 Press S
to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
ELECT
+ until the desired number of copies appears.
ALUE
to print the job.
ELECT
Proofing and Holding a Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
154
Deleting a Held Job
When a user sends a proof and hold job, the printer automatically deletes that
user’s previous stored proof and hold job. If there is not a proof and hold job
already stored for that job name and the printer needs additional space, the
printer may delete other stored proof and hold jobs starting with the oldest
one.
Note
If you turn the printer off and then back on, all quick copy, proof and hold,
and private jobs are deleted.
A stored proof and hold job can also be deleted from the control panel.
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
ENU
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
4 Press - V
5 Press S
to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
ELECT
until DELETE appears.
ALUE
to delete the job.
ELECT
Proofing and Holding a Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
155
Printing a Private Job
The private printing feature lets a user specify that a job is not printed until
that user releases it using a 4-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN)
through the printer’s control panel. The user specifies the PIN in the driver and
it is sent to the printer as part of the print job.
Specifying a Private Job
To specify that a job is private from the driver, select the Private Job option
and type a 4-digit PIN.
Releasing a Private Job
The user can print a private job from the control panel.
1 Press M
repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENUappears.
ENU
2 Press I
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
. PIN:0000 appears.
ELECT
4 Press - V
+ to change the first number of the PIN, and then press
ALUE
S
. An *appears in place of the number. Repeat these steps to change
ELECT
the remaining three numbers of the PIN. COPIES=1 appears.
Continued on next page.
Printing a Private Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
156
5 Press - V
6 Press S
+ until the desired number of copies appears.
ALUE
to print the job.
ELECT
Deleting a Private Job
A private job is automatically deleted from the printer’s hard disk after the user
releases it for printing, unless the user selects the Stored Job option in the
driver.
Note
If you turn the printer off and then back on, all quick copy, proof and hold,
and private jobs are deleted.
A private job can also be deleted from the printer’s control panel before it is
ever printed.
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENUappears.
ENU
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
to select the job. PIN:0000 appears.
ELECT
4 Press - V
+ to change the first number of the PIN, and then press
ALUE
S
. An *appears in place of the number. Repeat these steps to change
ELECT
the remaining three numbers of the PIN. COPIES=1 appears.
5 Press - V
until DELETE appears.
ALUE
6 Press S
to delete the job.
ELECT
Printing a Private Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
157
Storing a Print Job
The user can download a print job to the printer’s hard disk without printing it.
The user can then print the job at any time through the printer’s control panel.
For example, a user may want to download a personnel form, calendar, time
sheet, or accounting form that other users can access and print.
To store a print job permanently on the hard disk, select the Stored Job option
in the driver when printing the job.
Printing a Stored Job
The user can print a job stored on the printer’s hard disk from the control
panel.
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENUappears.
ENU
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
4 Press - V
5 Press S
to select the job name. COPIES=1 appears.
ELECT
+ until the desired number of copies appears.
ALUE
to print the job.
ELECT
Storing a Print Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
158
Deleting a Stored Job
Jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk can be deleted from the control panel.
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENUappears.
ENU
until the desired job name appears.
TEM
3 Press S
4 Press - V
5 Press S
to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
ELECT
until DELETE appears.
ALUE
to delete the job.
ELECT
Storing a Print Job
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
159
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed
Connect
The HP Fast InfraRed Connect enables wireless printing from any IRDA-
compliant portable device (such as a laptop computer) to the HP LaserJet
8100, 8100 N, or 8100 DN printer.
The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending infrared (FIR)
port within operating range. Note that the connection can be blocked by
objects such as a hand, paper, direct sunlight, or any bright light shining into
either FIR port.
Note
For more information, see the user guide for the HP Fast InfraRed Connect.
Setting Up to Print with Windows 3.1x
Note
When printing in Windows 3.1, go to the Printers panel in the Control Panel
window and make sure that Use Print Manager is selected and that Fast
Printing Direct to Port is not selected.
1 Make sure that the printer is in READY mode.
2 From the Program Manager window, select the Main group, and then select
Control Panel.
Continued on next page.
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Connect
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
160
3 From the Printers window, make sure that the appropriate printer is
selected. If not, click Select and select the printer.
4 Click Connect and choose the same COM port setting as the FIR port on
your portable computer.
5 Select the file to print.
Setting Up to Print with Windows 9x
Before launching the InfraRed Driver, complete the following steps:
1 From the Printers panel, select the HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N, or 8100 DN
as your default printer.
2 While in the same Printers panel, go to Properties/Details, and make sure
that Virtual Infrared LPT Port is selected.
3 Select the file to print.
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Connect
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
161
Printing a Job
1 Align your laptop computer (or other portable device equipped with an
IRDA-compliant FIR window) within 2 to 3 feet (1 meter) maximum of the
HP Fast InfraRed Connect. The FIR window must be at an angle of +/- 15
degrees to ensure an effective connection for printing. The following
graphic illustrates the required alignment of devices necessary for printing.
2 - 3 ft.
(1 m)
Continued on next page.
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Connect
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
162
2 Print the job. The status indicator on the HP Fast InfraRed Connect lights
up, and, after a short delay, the printer status panel displays PROCESSING
JOB.
If the status indicator does not light up, realign the HP Fast InfraRed Connect
with the FIR port on the sending device, resend the print job, and maintain the
alignment of all devices. If you have to move the equipment (for example, to
add paper), make sure that all devices remain within the range of operation to
maintain the connection.
If the connection is interrupted before your print job is complete, the
HP Fast InfraRed Connect status indicator turns off. You have up to 40
seconds to correct the interruption and continue the job. If the connection is
resumed within this time, the status indicator lights up again.
Note
The connection is permanently broken if the sending port is moved out of
operating range or if anything passing between the ports blocks
transmission. (This block could be a hand, paper, or even direct sunlight.)
Depending on the size of the job, printing with the HP Fast InfraRed
Connect may be slower than printing with a cable connected directly to the
parallel port.
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Connect
Chapter 3
Advanced Printing Tasks
163
Interrupting and Resuming Printing
The job interrupt and resume feature lets a user temporarily stop the job that is
currently printing in order to print another job. When the new job is finished
printing, the interrupted job resumes printing.
A user can only interrupt jobs that are printing and collating multiple copies by
connecting to the infrared (FIR) port on the printer and sending a job to the
printer. The printer stops printing the current job when it reaches the end of
the copy it is printing. The printer then prints the job sent over the FIR
connection. When the printer is done printing that job, it resumes printing the
original job with multiple copies where it left off.
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Connect
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
164
Printer Maintenance
4
Overview
This chapter explains basic printer maintenance.
z Managing the Toner Cartridge
z Cleaning the Printer
Note
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer will prompt you to perform
printer maintenance every 350,000 pages. When the PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE message appears on the control panel, you will need to
purchase a Printer Maintenance Kit and install the new parts. Then remove
the message by turning the service message off in the Configuration Menu.
For ordering information, see page 38.
The Printer Maintenance Kit is a consumable and is not covered under
warranty.
Overview
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
165
Managing the Toner Cartridge
HP Policy on Non-HP Toner Cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP toner cartridges,
either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot
influence their design or control their quality.
To install a new HP toner cartridge and recycle the used cartridge, follow the
instructions included in the toner cartridge box.
Toner Cartridge Storage
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until you are ready to use
it.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more
than a few minutes. Do not store the toner cartridge at temperatures above
95° F (35° C) or below 32° F (0° C).
Managing the Toner Cartridge
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
166
Toner Cartridge Life Expectancy
The life of the toner cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs
require. When printing text at 5% coverage, an HP toner cartridge lasts an
average of 20,000 pages. (A typical business letter is about 5% coverage.)
This assumes that print density is set to 3 and EconoMode is off. (These are
the default settings.)
Checking the Toner Level
The user can find out how much toner is left in the printer cartridge by printing
a configuration page (see page 278). The Toner Level section on the
configuration page provides a graphical representation of how much toner is
left in the cartridge.
Note
This value might become inaccurate if a user fails to select YES when the
NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO message is displayed on the control panel after
replacing a low toner cartridge.
Managing the Toner Cartridge
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
167
Resetting the HP TonerGauge
After a new toner cartridge is installed, the user must reset the
HP TonerGauge from the control panel. When the top cover is closed after
installing the new toner cartridge, the NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO message is
displayed on the control panel for approximately 30 seconds. To reset the
HP TonerGauge:
Note
If the NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NOmessage is no longer displayed on the control
panel, press M repeatedly until CONFIGURATION MENUappears. When you
ENU
replace an empty or low toner cartridge, press I
TONER CARTRIDGE=NO appears.
repeatedly until NEW
TEM
1 Press - V
+ until YES appears.
ALUE
2 Press S
to save the selection.
ELECT
3 Press G to exit the menu.
O
Managing the Toner Cartridge
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
168
Continue Printing When Toner is Low
When toner is low, the printer’s control panel displays the TONER LOW message.
If the TONER LOWmessage displays, but the printer continues printing, TONER LOW
is set to CONTINUE (the default setting).
If the printer stops printing when low toner is detected, TONER LOWis set to STOP.
To resume printing, press G .
O
The printer will continue to display TONER LOW until you replace the toner
cartridge.
Note
The control panel will display NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO. Press I
to change
TEM
the value to YES, and then press S
.
ELECT
Select TONER LOW=CONTINUE or TONER LOW=STOP from the Configuration Menu in
the control panel (page 375).
Managing the Toner Cartridge
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
169
Redistributing the Toner
When toner is low, faded or light areas might appear on a printed page. You
might be able to temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner.
The following procedure might allow you to finish the current print job before
replacing the toner cartridge.
Continued on next page.
Managing the Toner Cartridge
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
170
Redistributing the Toner (continued)
1
1 Open the top cover.
2 Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area in the
left door. It may be HOT.
2
3 Rotate the toner cartridge and gently shake it
from side to side to redistribute the toner.
Note
3
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a
dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. (Hot
water sets toner into fabric.)
4 Reinsert the toner cartridge into the printer
and close the top cover.
4
If the print remains light, install a new toner
cartridge. (Follow the instructions provided with
the new toner cartridge.)
Managing the Toner Cartridge
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
171
Cleaning the Printer
To maintain print quality, clean the printer thoroughly:
z Every time you change the toner cartridge.
z Whenever print quality problems occur.
Clean the outside of the printer with a lightly water-dampened cloth. Clean the
inside with only a dry, lint-free cloth. Observe all warnings and cautions with
the cleaning tasks on the following page.
CAUTION
To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge, do not use ammonia-
based cleaners on or around your printer.
Continued on next page.
Cleaning the Printer
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
172
1
2
3
4
1 Before you begin these steps, turn the printer
off and unplug all cables.
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area in the
left door. It may be HOT.
2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove
the toner cartridge.
CAUTION
Do not touch the transfer roller (A). Skin oils on
the roller can reduce print quality. If toner gets
on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and
wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets
toner into fabric.
3 With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any residue
from the paper path area, the registration
roller (B), and the toner cartridge cavity.
4 Replace the toner cartridge, close the
printer, reconnect all cables, and turn the
printer on.
Cleaning the Printer
Chapter 4
Printer Maintenance
173
Using the Printer Cleaning Page
If toner specks appear on the front or back side of your print jobs, follow the
procedure below.
From the printer’s control panel, do the following:
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until PRINT QUALITY MENU appears.
ENU
repeatedly until CREATE CLEANING PAGE appears.
TEM
3 Press S
to create the cleaning page.
ELECT
4 Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the cleaning
process.
Note
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier
grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
When toner has been cleaned from inside the printer, shiny black spots will
appear on the page’s black strip. If white spots appear on the black strip, print
another cleaning page.
To ensure good print quality with certain types of paper, use the cleaning page
every time the toner cartridge is replaced. If the cleaning page is frequently
needed, try a different type of paper.
Cleaning the Printer
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
174
Problem Solving
5
Overview
This chapter will help you to solve printer problems.
Clearing Paper
Jams
(see page 176)
Occasionally, paper can jam during printing. This section will help
you to locate paper jams, properly clear them from the printer, and
solve repeated paper jams.
Understanding
Printer Messages
(see page 198)
Many different messages can appear on the printer’s control panel
display. Some messages tell the printer’s current status, such as
INITIALIZING. Other messages require an action, such as
CLOSE TOP COVER. Many of these messages are self-explanatory.
However, some messages indicate a problem with the printer, or
Continued on next page.
Overview
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
175
Correcting Output
Quality Problems
(see page 221)
The printer should produce print jobs of the highest quality. If print
jobs do not look sharp and clear, defects such as lines, specks, or
smears appear on the page, or paper is wrinkled or curled, use this
section to troubleshoot and solve the output quality problem.
Printer Problems
(see page 229)
Before you can fix a printer problem, you must understand where the
problem is. Use the tables in this section to determine the printer
problem, and then follow the corresponding troubleshooting
suggestions.
Checking the
Printer’s
Configuration
(see page 277)
From the printer, you can print information pages that give details
about the printer and its configuration.
Overview
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
176
Clearing Paper Jams
If the printer’s control panel displays a paper jam message, look for paper in
the locations indicated in the graphic on page 177, then see the procedure for
clearing the paper jam. You might need to look for paper in other locations
than indicated in the paper jam message. If the location of the paper jam is not
When clearing paper jams, be very careful not to tear the paper. If a small
piece of paper is left in the printer, it could cause additional jams. If paper
jams are a recurring problem, see page 196.
Note
After the jam is cleared, the top cover of the printer must be opened and
closed to clear the paper jam message from the control panel.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
177
Paper jams can occur at the following locations:
Standard Output Bin
Top cover area
Tray 1
Stapler
Right door
Multibin Mailbox *
Left door
Vertical transfer door
2000-sheet Input Tray *
(Tray 4)
Tray 2 and Tray 3
Front door
* Other paper handling accessories may be installed in these positions.
Note
should clear after a few sheets are printed.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
178
Clearing Jams from the Input Tray Areas
Clearing Tray 1
1 Open Tray 1 by pulling down.
2 Check for paper in the Tray 1 area.
3 Remove any paper from this area by pulling it in the direction shown by the
arrow in the graphic below. Carefully check to be sure you have removed all
pieces of torn paper.
4 Open and close the top cover.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
179
Clearing the Right Door
1 Open the right door located below Tray 1.
2 Check for paper in this area.
3 Open the jam access cover using the green lever.
4 Remove any paper from this area by pulling it out of the printer.
5 Be sure to remove all pieces of torn paper.
Jam Access Cover
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
181
Clearing the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Trays
(4 and 5)
1 Open the tray.
2 Remove damaged or jammed paper from area (A) by pulling it out of the
printer.
3 Be sure to remove all pieces of torn paper.
4 Close the tray.
5 Open the vertical transfer door and remove jammed paper (B).
6 Close the vertical transfer door.
7 Open and close the top cover.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
183
Clearing the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)
1 Open Tray 4.
2 Remove damaged or jammed paper from area (A) by pulling it out of the
printer.
3 Be sure to remove all pieces of torn paper.
4 Close the tray.
5 Open the vertical transfer door and remove all jammed paper (B).
6 Close the vertical transfer door.
7 Open and close the top cover.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
185
Clearing the Optional Envelope Feeder
1 Open the top cover.
2 Remove toner cartridge (A).
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may be HOT.
3 Remove envelopes in this area by pulling them straight up and out of the
printer (B).
4 Be sure to remove any pieces of torn paper. Lift both of the green user tabs
and remove any envelopes that may be hidden (C).
5 You may need to remove any loaded envelopes and the optional envelope
feeder to release envelopes or torn pieces of paper.
6 Replace the optional envelope feeder and toner cartridge and close the top
cover.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
187
Clearing Jams from the Optional Duplex Printing Accessory
1 Open the front door.
2 Check for paper in this area.
3 Remove any paper from area (A) by pulling it out of the printer. Be careful
not to tear the paper.
4 If you cannot remove all the paper through the front door, open the left door
and carefully pull out any paper from area (B). (If a mailbox accessory is
installed, first push it away from the printer to access the left door.)
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may be HOT.
5 If a duplexer is installed, turn the printer off and remove the duplexer by
pressing the colored tab on the lower right side of the unit and pulling the
entire unit out of its slot.
6 Remove any paper remaining in the duplexer (C).
7 Reinstall the duplexer by sliding it back into the slot until it clicks into place.
Close all open doors. If a mailbox is installed, push it back into place and
turn the printer on.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
189
Clearing Jams from the Top Cover Area
1 Open the top cover.
2 Remove the toner cartridge (A).
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may be HOT.
3 Lift the green lever and remove any paper that may be hidden.
4 Remove any paper in this area by pulling it straight up and out of the printer
(B).
5 Be sure to remove all pieces of torn paper.
6 Replace the toner cartridge and close the top cover.
A
B
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
191
Clearing the Left Door (Fuser Area)
1 Open the left door. (If a mailbox accessory is installed, first push it away
from the printer to access the left door.)
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may be HOT.
2 Remove any jammed or damaged paper from this area by pulling it out of
the printer (A).
3 Press down on the green tabs (B) and carefully check for paper. Be sure to
remove all pieces of torn paper.
4 Close the left door. If a mailbox is installed, push it back into place.
B
A
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
192
Clearing the Optional Multibin Mailboxes
1 Turn off the printer.
3 Remove paper from area (A) by carefully pulling it out, away from the
printer.
4 Pull the mailbox away from the printer and remove any paper in
area (B). Be sure to remove any torn pieces of paper.
5 Remove any paper in area (C) by carefully pulling it out of the printer.
Note
When clearing paper jams, be very careful not to tear the paper. If a small
piece of paper is left in the printer, it could cause additional jams. If paper
jams are a recurring problem, see page 196.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
194
Clearing Jams from the Stapler
1
2
3
4
1 Remove the Face-up Bin.
2 Open the stapler unit cover.
3 Press the colored tab with your forefinger and
pull the colored circular tab with your other
forefinger to open the stapler.
4 Remove loose or damaged staples from the
stapler head. Push the circular tab to snap it
back into place.
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
195
5 Close the stapler unit cover and replace the
Face-up Bin. Clear all paper paths that may
have jammed as a result of the jammed
staples.
5
Note
After clearing a stapler jam, up to two
documents may not be stapled when printing
resumes because the stapler must reload. Once
the unit begins stapling again, either manually
staple the unstapled documents or resend the
job.
If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or
out of staples, the job will still print.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
196
Solving Repeated Paper Jams
Situation
Solution
General
1. Check to see that paper is correctly loaded in the trays and that all
repeated paper width guides are correctly set (not skewed). See Chapter 2, “Printing
jam problems
Tasks.”
2. Make sure that the paper tray is set for the size of paper installed and
that the tray is not overloaded with paper.
3. Try turning over the stack of paper in the tray. If you are using
letterhead paper, try printing from Tray 1.
4. Do not use previously printed paper or torn, worn, or irregular paper.
For recommended paper and other paper for your printer, see page 328.
5. Check the paper specifications. (If paper is outside of the
recommended specifications, problems may occur.)
Continued on next page.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
197
Situation
Solution
6. When duplexing, the printer rolls paper under Tray 3 and may cause a
jam. Pull Tray 3 out of the printer completely and remove any paper from
under the tray. Insert Tray 3 back into the printer.
7. Printer may be dirty. Clean the printer as described on page 171.
8. Check that the correct paper size is installed (page 328).
9. Check that all damaged or jammed paper is removed by pulling it out
of the printer.
Note
If jams continue, contact your authorized HP service provider.
Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
198
Understanding Printer Messages
The table on page 199 explains messages that might display on the printer’s
control panel. Printer messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical
order, with numbered messages following.
If a message persists:
z If a message persists requesting that you load a tray or if a message
indicates that a previous print job is still in the printer’s memory, press G
O
to print or press C J to clear the job from the printer’s memory.
ANCEL OB
z If a message persists after performing all of the recommended actions,
contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the
HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide.)
Note
Not all messages are described in this user guide (many are
self-explanatory).
Some printer messages are affected by the AUTO CONTINUE and CLEARABLE
WARNINGsettings from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel
(page 375).
Continued on next page.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
199
Using the Printer Online Help System
This printer features an online Help system that provides instructions for
resolving most printer errors. Certain control panel error messages alternate
with instructions on accessing the online help system.
Whenever a ? appears in a error message or a message alternates with FOR
HELP PRESS THE ? KEY, press the I
key to navigate through a sequence of
TEM
instructions.
To exit the online Help system, press G .
O
Printer Messages
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
ACCESS DENIED
MENUS LOCKED
The printer control panel function you are trying to access has been
locked to prevent unauthorized access.
See your network administrator.
BAD DUPLEXER
CONNECTION
The duplexer is not connected properly.
Turn the printer off. Re-install the duplexer. Turn the printer back on.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
200
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
CHECK INPUT
DEVICE
The optional input tray cannot feed paper to the printer because a
door or paper guide is open.
alternates with
Check the doors and paper guides.
PAPER PATH OPEN
PLEASE CLOSE IT
CHECK OUTPUT
DEVICE
The optional output device is not properly connected to the printer.
A proper connection must be made for printing to continue.
alternates with
CLOSE OUTPUT
DELIVERY PATH
CHECKING PAPER
PATH
The engine is rolling its rollers to check for possible paper jams.
CHOSEN LANGUAGE
NOT AVAILABLE
A print job requested a printer language that does not exist in the
printer. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add
the requested language to the printer (if available).
Press G to continue.
O
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
201
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
CLOSE RIGHT DOOR
The right access door is open and must be closed for printing to
continue.
CLOSE TOP OR
LEFT DOOR
Either the top cover or the left door is open and must be closed for
printing to continue.
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The EIO disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.
Remove the EIO disk and replace it with a new one.
DISK FILE
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
OPERATION FAILED
DISK FILE
Delete files from the EIO disk and then try again. Use HP LaserJet
Resource Manager to download or delete files and fonts. (See the
software help for more information.)
SYSTEM IS FULL
DISK IS
The EIO disk is protected, and no new files can be written to it.
WRITE PROTECTED
Disable the write protection through HP LaserJet Resource
Manager.
EIO n DISK
The disk accessory card takes a long time to initialize. The first
parameter is the accessory slot number for this disk accessory card.
INITIALIZING
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
202
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
EIO n DISK
The EIO disk is not working correctly.
Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated.
Replace it with a new EIO disk.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
EIO n
Wait for the message to disappear (approximately 5 minutes). If the
printer EIO card is operating correctly and communicating with the
network, this message disappears after approximately one minute
and no action is required.
INITIALIZING
alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
If the EIO card is unable to communicate with the network, this
message remains for five minutes and then disappears. In this case
the printer is not communicating with the network (even though the
message is no longer present). The problem may be a bad EIO card,
a bad cable or connection on the network, or a network problem.
Contact your network administrator.
EIO n DISK
The disk accessory card takes a long time to initialize. The first
parameter is the accessory slot number for this accessory card.
SPINNING UP
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
203
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
ENV FEEDER LOAD
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder.
Make sure the envelope size and type are set correctly from the
Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel (page 360).
Press G if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder.
O
Press - V
+ to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press
ALUE
S
to accept the alternate type or size.
ELECT
EXTERNAL DEVICE
INITIALIZING
When an external paper handling device is connected to the printer,
it must have 10 seconds to initialize after boot or after coming out of
Power Save mode.
FINISHER LOW ON
FINISHING AGENT
The finishing device is running out of its finishing material and
needs to be refilled.
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
The flash DIMM had a critical failure and no longer can be used.
Remove the flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.
FLASH FILE
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
OPERATION FAILED
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
204
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
FLASH FILE
Delete files from the flash DIMM. Use HP LaserJet Resource
Manager to download or delete files and fonts. (See the software
help for more information.)
SYSTEM IS FULL
FLASH IS
The flash DIMM is protected and no new files can be written to it.
WRITE PROTECTED
Disable the write protection through HP LaserJet Resource
Manager.
INPUT DEVICE
An input paper handling device has a condition that needs attention
before printing can resume.
CONDITION xx.yy
See the documentation that came with the paper handling device for
assistance.
INSTALL TONER
CARTRIDGE
The toner cartridge has been removed and must be replaced for
printing to continue.
INSTALL TRAY X
The specified tray is not installed and must be inserted and closed
for printing to continue.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
205
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
LOADING
Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer’s file system. At
bootup time these entities are loaded into RAM. (These entities can
take a long time to load into RAM depending on the size and number
of entities being loaded.) The <number>specifies a sequence number
indicating the current program being loaded.
PROGRAM <number>
alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested paper into Tray 1.
Press G if the desired paper is already loaded in Tray 1.
O
MEMORY FULL
There is no available memory in the printer. The current job might
not print correctly and some resources (such as downloaded fonts
or macros) might have been deleted.
STORED DATA LOST
You might want to add more memory to the printer (page 392).
MEMORY SETTINGS
CHANGED
The printer changed its memory settings because it did not have
enough memory to use the previous settings for I/O Buffering and
Resource Saving. This usually occurs after removing memory from
the printer, adding a duplexer, or adding a printer language.
You might want to change memory settings for I/O Buffering and
Resource Saving (although default settings are usually best) or add
more memory to the printer (page 392).
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
206
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
MEMORY SHORTAGE
JOB CLEARED
The printer did not have enough free memory to print the entire job.
The remainder of the job will not print and will be cleared from
memory.
Press G to continue.
O
Change the Resource Saving setting from the printer’s control panel
(page 354) or add more memory to the printer (page 392).
MEMORY SHORTAGE
PAGE SIMPLIFIED
The printer had to compress the job in order to fit it in available
memory. Some data loss might have occurred.
Press G to continue.
O
The print quality of these pages may not be acceptable. Reduce the
complexity of these pages and reprint them.
You might want to add more memory to the printer (page 392).
OFFLINE
Press G to place the printer online.
O
OUTPUT BIN FULL
CLEAR (BIN nnn)
n (bin name)
The output bin is full and needs to be emptied.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
207
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
OUTPUT DEVICE
A recoverable error occurred in an external paper handling device.
Push the mailbox away from the printer, and then re-attach it.
CONDITION xx.yy
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user’s guide.)
PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer prompts you to perform
routine maintenance every 350,000 pages. To order a Printer
Maintenance Kit, see page 38.
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to clear the
message.
RAM DISK FILE
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
OPERATION FAILED
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
208
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Delete files using
HP LaserJet Resource Manager or another software utility. See the
software help for more information.)
If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. Change
the RAM disk size from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s
control panel (page 375).
STAPLER LOW
ON STAPLES
The stapler device is running out of staples and needs to be refilled.
STAPLER OUT OF
STAPLES
The stapler device is out of staples and needs to be replaced.
TONER LOW
See page 168.
TRAY x EMPTY
Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message.
If you do not load the specified tray, the printer will continue printing
from the next available tray, and the message will continue to
display.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
209
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
TRAY x LOAD
Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). (See the
[TYPE] [SIZE]
sections on loading paper, starting on page 84.)
Make sure that the trays are correctly adjusted for size.The tray type
settings (and size for Tray 1) must be set from the printer’s control
panel (page 144).
If you are trying to print A4 or letter size paper and this message
appears, make sure the default paper size is set correctly from the
Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel.
Press G to print from the next available tray.
O
Press - V
+ to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press
ALUE
S
to accept the alternate type or size.
ELECT
TRAY 2 LOAD
LEGAL
Load the requested paper into the indicated tray, or press S
override the message and to print on a loaded paper size.
to
ELECT
(or similar
messages
If printing does not continue, press G .
O
requesting that you
load paper)
UNABLE TO
MOPY JOB
Memory or file system failures would not allow a mopy job to occur.
Only one copy will be produced.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
210
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
UNSUPPORTED SIZE
IN TRAY [YY]
An external paper handling device detected an unsupported paper
size. The printer will go offline until the condition is corrected.
USE [TYPE]
If the requested paper size or type is not available, the printer asks
if it should use another paper size or type instead.
[SIZE] INSTEAD?
Press - V
+ to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press
ALUE
S
to accept the alternate type or size.
ELECT
WAIT FOR PRINTER
TO REINITIALIZE
The RAM disk setting has been changed from the printer’s control
panel. This change will not take effect until the printer reinitializes.
If you change the mode of the external device, turn the printer off,
turn the printer on and wait for the printer to reinitialize.
WRONG ENVELOPE
The envelope feeder you are trying to install will not work for this
printer.
FEEDER INSTALLED
To order an envelope feeder for the printer, see page 38.
Make sure the envelope feeder is installed correctly (page 117).
XX.YY
A printer error has occurred that can be cleared by pressing G in
O
PRINTER ERROR
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
the printer’s control panel.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
211
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
13.x PAPER JAM
[LOCATION]
Remove jammed paper from the specified location (page 176).
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.
If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor
might be stuck or broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
The printer received more data than can fit in its available memory.
You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or
complex graphics.
alternates with
Press G to print the transferred data (some data might be lost),
then simplify the print job or install additional memory (page 392).
O
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
21 PAGE TOO
COMPLEX
The data (dense text, rules, raster or vector graphics) sent to the
printer was too complex.
alternates with
Press G to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
O
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
To print the job without losing data, from the Configuration Menu in
the printer control panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON, print the job, and
then return PAGE PROTECT=AUTO. (See page 375.) Do not leave PAGE
PROTECT=ON; it might degrade performance.
If this message appears often, simplify the print job.
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
212
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
22 EIO x
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An
improper communications protocol may be in use.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
Press G to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)
O
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Check the host configuration. If this message persists, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Customer
Care pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent to the parallel port.
Check for a loose cable connection and be sure to use a high-quality
cable (page 45). (Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin
connections or might otherwise not conform to the IEEE-1284
specification.)
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
This error can occur if the driver you are using is not IEEE-1284
compliant. For best results, use an HP driver that came with the
printer (page 59).
Press G to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
O
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
213
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
40 EIO x BAD
TRANSMISSION
The connection has been broken between the printer and the EIO
card in the specified slot.
alternates with
Press G to clear the error message and continue printing.
O
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
41.3 UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE
The paper size you are trying to print is not the same as the control
panel setting for Tray 1.
Reload the tray with the correct paper size.
Make sure that the control panel setting for Tray 1 or the Envelope
Feeder is correctly adjusted for size. (The printer will continue trying
to print the job until size settings are correct.)
After performing the actions above, press G twice. The page
O
containing the error will automatically be reprinted if jam recovery is
enabled. (Or, you might want to press C
J
ANCEL OB
to clear the job
from the printer’s memory.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
214
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
41.x
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
Press G . The page containing the error will automatically be
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.
O
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer
on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
50.x FUSER ERROR
An internal error has occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the
printer on.
The message might clear and then reappear when the next print job
is sent. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service
or support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
51.x or 52.x
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
215
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
53.xy.zz
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The DIMM that caused
PRINTER ERROR
the error will not be used. Values of x, y, and zz are as follows:
x = DIMM type
0 = ROM
1 = RAM
y = Device location
0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM)
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
zz = Error number
You might need to replace the specified DIMM.
Turn the printer off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the
error.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
216
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
55.xx PRINTER
ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
Press G . The page containing the error will automatically be
O
alternates with
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer
on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
56.x
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
57.x
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
217
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
58.x
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Turn the printer off, then turn the printeron.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
59.x
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
62.x
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The x value refers to
the location of the problem:
PRINTER ERROR
0 = Internal memory
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
You might need to replace the specified DIMM.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
218
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
64
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
66.xy.zz INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
An error occurred in an external paper handling device.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
66.00.xx
An error occurred in an external paper handling device.
Turn the printer off.
Service ERROR
alternates with
Disconnect the cables to all external paper handling devices, and
then reconnect them.
CHECK CABLES AND
CYCLE POWER
Turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
219
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
68 NVRAM ERROR
CHECK SETTINGS
An error occurred in the printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and
one or more printer settings has been reset to its factory default.
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to
determine which values have changed (page 278).
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
68 NVRAM FULL
CHECK SETTINGS
The printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) is full. Some settings
might have been reset to the factory defaults.
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to
determine which values have changed (page 278).
Hold down C J while turning the printer on. This will clean up
ANCEL OB
the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
220
Printer Messages (continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
69.x
A temporary printing error occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
alternates with
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the front of
this user guide.)
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
79.xxxx
The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the
PRINTER ERROR
specific type of error.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. Try printing a job
from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the
first application and try printing a different file. (If the message only
appears with a certain software application or print job, contact the
software vendor for assistance.)
If the message persists with different software applications and print
jobs, record the numbers that appear (xxxx) and contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Customer
Care pages at the front of this user guide.)
Understanding Printer Messages
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
221
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Use the examples below to determine which output quality problem you are
experiencing, then see the following tables to troubleshoot the problem.
Note
The examples below depict letter-size paper that has passed through the
printer long-edge first. (If the paper has passed through the printer
short-edge first, lines and repeating defects will run vertically rather than
horizontally.)
Continued on next page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
223
Troubleshooting Steps
(Follow the steps in the
order they are listed.)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
1. Print a few more pages to
see if the problem will
correct itself.
✓
2. Clean the inside of the
printer or use the printer’s
cleaning page.
✓
3. Make sure EconoMode is
off.
✓
✓
4. Turn over the stack of
paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180
degrees.
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
5. Check the paper (or other
print media) type and quality.
6. Check the printer’s
environment.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
224
Troubleshooting Steps
(Follow the steps in the
order they are listed.)
✓
✓
✓
7. Make sure paper is loaded
correctly and guides are not
too tight or too loose against
the paper stack.
✓
8. Print to a different output
bin.
✓
✓
✓
9. Adjust the toner density
setting.
✓
✓
✓
10. Change the fuser mode
setting (page 146).
✓
✓
11. Redistribute the toner in
the toner cartridge.
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
12. Install a new HP toner
cartridge. (See instructions
provided with the toner
cartridge.)
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
225
Troubleshooting Steps
(Follow the steps in the
order they are listed.)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
13. Order and install the
Printer Maintenance Kit.
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
14. After trying all the steps
suggested above, contact
an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the
HP Customer Care pages in
the front of the user guide.)
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
226
Correcting Wrinkles on Envelopes
1
2
3
Note
Once you have used this method to print
envelopes, return the fuser levers to the up
position.
1 Open the left door. (If a mailbox accessory is
installed, first push it away from the printer to
access the left door.)
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may
be HOT.
2 Locate and release the levers on the fuser.
3 Close the left door.
When you are done printing on envelopes, make
sure you return the fuser levers to the up
position.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
227
Determining Printer Problems
Troubleshooting Checklist
z Printer Does Not Turn On
z Blank or Garbled Control Panel Display
z Printer Cannot Print Configuration Page
z Print Job Does Not Print
z Printing is Incomplete or Incorrect
z Print Job Does Not Print on Both Sides of Paper
z Problems with Tray 1
z Problems with Trays 2, 3, and the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
z Problems with the Optional 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler
z Problems with the Optional 8-bin Mailbox
Continued on next page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
228
z Problems with the Optional 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
z Problems with the Optional Duplex Printing Accessory
z Problems with the Optional Envelope Feeder
z Printer Hard Disk
z PS Troubleshooting
z HP Fast InfraRed Connect Problems
z Macintosh Problem Solving
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
229
Printer Problems
Printer Does Not Turn On
Situation
Solution
Printer is not plugged in. Plug the AC power cord firmly into the grounded power
receptacle and into the printer. (Be sure the power source is
energized.)
Printer voltage is not
correct.
Make sure line voltage is in the correct range. (See the
product label next to the power receptacle on the back of the
printer for voltage requirements.)
Blank or Garbled Control Panel Display
Situation
Solution
Printer is not turned on. Put the printer’s power switch in the on position.
Printer is turned on but
internal fans are not
running.
Make sure the line voltage is correct for the printer’s power
configuration. (See the plate next to the power receptacle on
the back of your printer for voltage requirements.) If you are
using a power strip and its voltage is not within specification,
plug the printer directly into the power receptacle.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
230
Blank or Garbled Control Panel Display (continued)
Situation
Solution
Display is blank and
internal fans are not
running.
Press all the keys to see if one is stuck; contact your
HP service representative if this does not work.
Printer display is in the
wrong language or
displays unfamiliar
characters.
Reconfigure the control panel display language. See the
getting started guide.
Printer Cannot Print Configuration Page
Situation
Solution
Correct size of paper is Check paper trays to be sure the correct sizes are loaded
not loaded.
(Letter or A4). Also, check that guides are set correctly.
Toner cartridge sealing
tape is not removed.
Remove sealing tape from toner cartridge. See the printer’s
getting started guide or the installation guide that came with
the toner cartridge.
Paper tray is out of paper. Load paper, see instructions starting on page 84.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
231
Printer Cannot Print Configuration Page (continued)
Situation Solution
A printer cover is open. Firmly close the printer top cover and all doors (left, front, and
right).
Paper is jammed in the
printer.
Check for paper jams, see instructions starting on page 176.
Messages appear in the See Understanding Printer Messages starting on page 198.
display.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
232
Software, Computer, and Printer Interface Problems
Print Job Does Not Print
Situation
Solution
Printer is off or not
connected to an active
power source.
Make sure the printer is on and that all power cables are firmly
plugged into both the printer components and an active power
source.
Printer is offline.
Press G to put the printer online. The printer control panel
O
should display READY and the Ready light should be lit.
z Connect another printer to current port and print.
Port is configured and
working properly.
z Make sure the print job is being sent to the correct port
(LPT1 or network printer port, for example).
z Check for loose I/O cable connections at the printer and
Printer is online but not
receiving data (the Data
light does not blink).
computer or network port.
z Try your I/O cable on a system that you know works.
z Check that the correct interface cable was selected and
securely connected to both the printer and the computer. If
the cable is not correctly configured, see the getting started
guide for configuration information.
Printer displays a
message.
See Understanding Printer Messages starting on page 198 for
printer messages and recommended actions.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
233
Print Job Does Not Print (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that you are using the correct printer driver.
z Complex print job may still be processing.
Data from a previous
print job is still in the
printer’s buffer.
z Make sure the printer is online. Make sure control panel
reads processing job.
z Open the Top Cover. Pull out the toner cartridge and check
for paper. Reseat the toner cartridge.
z Open trays 2 and 3. Make sure that the appropriate paper is
inserted. (For more information on paper specifications, see
page 330.) Close the trays.
z Make sure that you are using the correct printer driver.
z Complex print job may still be processing.
Last page did not print
and the Data light is on.
z Make sure the printer is online. Make sure the control panel
reads PROCESSING JOB.
z Open the Top Cover. Pull out the toner cartridge and check
for paper. Reseat the toner cartridge.
z Open trays 2 and 3. Make sure that the appropriate paper is
inserted. (For more information on paper specifications, see
page 330.) Close the trays.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
234
Print Job Does Not Print (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that you are using the correct printer driver.
z Complex print job may still be processing.
Data light is flashing but
nothing prints.
z Make sure the printer is online. Make sure control panel
reads processing job.
z Open the Top Cover. Pull out the toner cartridge and check
for paper. Reseat the toner cartridge.
z Open trays 2 and 3. Make sure that the appropriate paper is
inserted. (For more information on paper specifications, see
Print Speed is Too Slow
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that the printer is warm.
First page takes much
longer to print than
following pages.
z Set the Power Save feature for a longer time period. (See
Configuration Page on page 278.) If a page takes longer to
print due to complex formatting commands, changing the
Power Save setting might not improve print speed. You
might want to simplify the page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
235
Print Speed is Too Slow (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Printer speed is highly dependent on how your software
application is set up, which printer driver you are using, and
how much traffic is on the network. See the getting started
guide for configuration information.
Printer is usually slow to
respond.
z You might need to add more memory (page 397).
Printing is Incomplete or Incorrect
Situation
Solution
z Turn the printer off and then back on.
z Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly.
Blank pages print.
z Make sure the toner cartridge sealing tape has been
removed. Firmly pull the tab straight out from the cartridge
to remove the entire length of tape. Avoid touching any
black toner on the tape.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
236
Printing is Incomplete or Incorrect (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that your software application is configured for
Garbled pages print,
there are overprints, or
only a portion of a page
prints.
the correct printer.
z Replace the printer interface (I/O) cable with a cable you
know works to see if the cable is defective.
z Your parallel printer cable might be defective. Use a
high-quality cable; see page 38 for an HP cable part
number.
z Set the PERSONALITY item in the Configuration Menu to AUTO
(page 375). The printer may have been set to PCL and a PS
job was sent to the printer, or vice versa.
z Data sent to the printer may be corrupt. Try sending another
file to see if it prints.
z Turn the printer off. Make sure that the duplexer is properly
The job was not
duplexed.
installed. Turn the printer on.
z Make sure that you are using the correct paper size
(page 328).
z You may need to add more printer memory (page 397).
z Make sure that you are following the guidelines for printing
on both sides of the paper (see 111).
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
237
Printing is Incomplete or Incorrect (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Check your software application to be sure the print file
Data is missing, but there
are no printer messages.
contains no errors.
z Check your cable to make sure that it is securely connected
to both the printer and the computer.
z Your parallel printer cable may be defective. Use a
high-quality cable; see page 38 for an HP cable part
number.
z Check the control panel display for an error message.
Printing stops in the
middle of the job.
z If you are on a network, make sure the computer is correctly
configured and there is not a network problem (see your
network administrator).
z Check the line voltage to make sure that it is steady and
within printer specifications. (See page 328.) Turn the
printer off and then back on.
z Check the time-out setting in your network application. You
might need to increase it.
z If you are trying to copy a file to the printer from the DOS
prompt, use the copy command COPY [filename] LPTn /B
printer port, such as LPT1 (where nis the port number).
Note
To output the page, you might have to send a form feed
command from the computer.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
238
Printing is Incomplete or Incorrect (continued)
Situation
Solution
Printer printing more
To avoid printing more copies than requested, the collate
copies than requested.
function in the application must not be selected.
Printer Ignores Font, Format, or Tray/Bin Selection
Situation
Solution
z The font is not present in the printer and must be
downloaded from your software application or the proper
font DIMM must be installed. Check your software
application to make sure the correct printer driver has been
installed and configured. To verify that the font you want is
available, print a font list (page 282).
Printer prints wrong
fonts or formats.
z Your software selected a substitute font for one that is not
available in the printer. (See your software application
manual for more information on font selection.)
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
239
Printer Ignores Font, Format, or Tray/Bin Selection (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Be sure your software application is selecting the correct
Printer draws paper from
the wrong tray.
paper size.
z Make sure that the driver for your software application is
correctly installed, configured, and capable of requesting
the desired paper size and type.
z The size of paper requested is not loaded in the tray
selected. The printer draws paper from the next default tray
that contains the correct size. Load the correct paper into
the tray and make sure the tray is adjusted correctly. Load
the tray with enough paper to complete the print job.
z If you selected the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or the
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 or 5) and did not turn the
printer off when installing it, the printer does not recognize
it and draws paper from the next default tray source. (Turn
the printer off, then back on, and the printer will recognize
the tray.)
Control panel settings,
such as RESOLUTION or
Software commands override control panel settings. (See
page 52 for information about how your software works with
ORIENTATION, do not work control panel settings.)
or are ignored.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
240
Printer Ignores Font, Format, or Tray/Bin Selection (continued)
Situation
Solution
Job went to a different
bin than was expected.
The wrong size or type of paper was used for the job. (See
page 330 for supported paper sizes.)
z Make sure you have loaded the paper correctly. (Starting on
Job prints on the wrong
side of the paper.
page 84.)
z If you are printing one-sided copies, load paper into Tray 1
with the side to be printed facing up. Load paper into Trays
2, 3, and the 2000-sheet Input Tray with the side to be
printed facing down.
z If you are printing two-sided copies, load paper into Tray 1
with the first side to be printed facing down. Load paper into
Trays 2, 3, and the 2000-sheet Input Tray with the first side
to be printed facing up.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
241
Print Job Does Not Print on Both Sides of Paper
Situation
Solution
Driver may not be set up to Make sure that the option to print on both sides of the paper is
print on both sides of the
paper.
properly configured in the driver.
The file you are trying to
print may not have the
option to print on both sides
of the paper turned on.
Make sure that the option to print on both sides of the paper is
configured in the driver.
Type has been specified as z Make sure that the media type can be printed on both sides
labels, transparencies, or
envelopes.
(see page 111).
z Change the media type to the proper media type for printing
on both sides.
Cannot print on both sides Remove the custom paper tray. Turn the printer off, and turn the
of custom-size paper. printer on. Then print on both sides of the paper from Tray 1.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
242
Print Job on Custom Paper Does Not Print Correctly
Situation
Solution
The control panel and driver Make sure that the custom paper size defined from the control panel
are not set to the same
paper size.
and the custom paper size defined in the driver are the same.
Problems with Tray 1
Situation
Solution
z A previous print job may still be in the printer’s buffer.
Cannot clear
MANUALLY FEED
z Make sure that Tray 1 has the correct paper size loaded. For
more information on paper specifications, see page 328.
[TYPE] [SIZE] message.
Cannot print from
Tray 1.
Make sure to select Manual Feed or Tray 1 through your
software application and the size and type for which the tray is
configured. For Manual Feed, wait for the printer to request
the manual feed before loading the paper.
Paper is loaded into
Load the correct paper into the tray. See Loading Tray 1 on
Tray 1 and the control
panel displays a load or
manual feed message.
page 84. If the correct paper is already loaded, press G .
O
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
243
Problems with Tray 1 (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Verify that the correct output bin is selected in the printer
driver. For more information on changing printer driver
settings, see the online help.
Paper is not going to the
correct output bin.
z The paper does not meet the specifications for the output
bin. See page 330 for more information on paper
specifications.
Problems with Trays 2, 3, and the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5)
Situation
Solution
General operation
problems.
For general paper operation information, see Chapter 2,
Printing Tasks.
z See Clearing Trays 2 and 3 or Clearing the Optional
Paper jams and paper
feeding problems.
2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) earlier in this Chapter.
z Make sure that paper specifications are within
recommended range (page 328).
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
244
Problems with Trays 2, 3, and the Optional 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5) (continued)
Situation
Solution
z The appropriate paper size and type must be selected from
Cannot access Trays 2, 3,
or the Optional
the software application for the paper size loaded.
z Adjust the tray correctly for the paper size loaded. Check
the Paper Handling Menu for correct type of paper available
(page 360).
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray
(Trays 4 and 5).
TRAY LOAD x
Load the requested paper size or press S
to print on a
ELECT
[TYPE] [SIZE] paper size size already loaded. The printer has a job in the buffer and is
message.
waiting to print on the correct paper size.
Set the paper type in the control panel (page 354).
Problems with the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)
Situation
Solution
Paper size adjustment
and installation.
See “Paper Specifications” on page 328 and “Loading the
Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)” on page 92 for more
information on paper size adjustment and installation.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
245
Problems with the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) (continued)
Situation
Solution
z See page 183 for instructions.
Paper jams and paper
feeding problems.
z Make sure that paper specifications are within the
recommended range (page 328).
panel for Tray 4 matches the paper loaded in Tray 4 (page
92).
z A tray might have been pulled out during printing.
z Check cables and connectors between the tray and the
printer. See page 255 for cabling configurations.
z Remove and reconnect the power cord if it is not firmly
plugged into the computer.
z Make sure trays are correctly loaded.
z Make sure the paper guides are adjusted properly and not
skewed (page 92).
z The power cord is not firmly plugged into both the printer
and the power receptacle. Remove and reconnect the power
cord.
Tray 4 will not power on.
Cannot access Tray 4.
z Check cables and connectors between the tray and the
printer. See page 255 for cabling configurations.
Make sure that the paper tray guides are adjusted correctly for
the paper size you are using (page 92).
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
246
Problems with the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Make sure the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray has been
configured in the printer driver. See page 56 for more
information on accessing the printer driver.
Printer does not
recognize Tray 4.
z Turn the printer off and then back on.
z Make sure that the C-link cable from the Tray 4 base is
plugged into the printer. If not, turn the printer off and plug
the cable into the printer, then turn the printer back on. See
page 255 for cabling configurations.
255 for cabling configurations.
z If the printer still does not recognize Tray 4, contact your
dealer or authorized HP service provider.
z Make sure that the correct output bin is selected in the
printer driver. For more information on changing printer
driver settings, see the online help.
Paper is not going to the
correct output bin.
z The paper does not meet the specifications for the output
bin. See page 330 for more information on paper
specifications.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
247
Problems with the Optional 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler
Situation Solution
The job was not stapled. Jobs sent to the stapler might not be stapled for one or more
of the following reasons:
z The wrong size or type of paper was used for the job.
z More than 20 pages were sent to the stapler, exceeding its
capacity.
(See page 194.)
z A staple jam was recently cleared (up to 2 following jobs
might not be stapled).
z The job was sent to a bin other than the stapler bin because
the wrong size or type of paper was used for the job.
z One-page jobs will not be stapled.
z The interface cable between the mailbox and the stapler
unit may be defective or not connected properly.
z Check to see that the job to be stapled is less than 2 mm
General repeated stapler
jam problems.
thick.
z Stapler may have some trapped staple wires that are
obstructing the magazine. Remove loose staples and paper
dust from the inside of the stapler (page 194).
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
248
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler has been
configured in the printer driver. See page 56 for more
information on accessing the printer driver.
Printer does not
recognize the 5-bin
Mailbox with Stapler.
z Make sure that the cable from the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler
is plugged into the printer C-link connector. If not, turn the
printer off and plug the cable into the C-link connector, then
turn the printer back on. See page 255 for cabling
configurations.
z Make sure that all bins are properly installed.
z If the printer still does not recognize the 5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler, contact your dealer or authorized HP service
provider.
z Check the cable between the printer and the stapler. Make
sure it is properly connected at both ends. See page 255 for
cabling configurations.
Printer does not
recognize stapler.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
249
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that the power cord is firmly plugged into both
the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler and the power receptacle.
Remove and reconnect the power cord.
The 5-bin Mailbox with
Stapler will not power on.
z Make sure that the cable from the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler
is plugged into the printer C-link connector. If not, turn the
printer off, plug the cable into the C-link connector, then
turn the printer back on. See page 255 for cabling
configurations.
z Verify that the cables are firmly attached to the printer.
z Make sure that you are using the supported paper weights
Paper jams and paper
feeding problems.
(page 330).
z Do not pull paper out of the bins while printing.
z Check cables and connectors between the printer and the
5-bin Mailbox with Stapler. See page 255 for cabling
configurations.
z Repeated paper jams in the multibin mailbox area might
indicate that the printer and multibin mailbox are set up on
an uneven floor. Move the printer to a level location.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
250
Problems with the Optional 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Verify that the correct output bin is selected in the printer
driver. For more information on changing printer driver
settings, see the online help.
Paper is not going to the
correct output bin.
z The paper does not meet the specifications for the output
bin. See page 330 for more information on paper
specifications.
z If you are trying to send print jobs to an optional multibin
mailbox, verify that the multibin mailbox has been installed
on the printer and in the printer driver. Also verify the
multibin mailbox mode, which will affect the print job
destination.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
251
Problems with the Optional 8-bin Mailbox
Situation
z Make sure that the 8-bin Mailbox has been configured in the
printer driver. See page 56 for more information on
Printer does not
recognize the Mailbox.
z Make sure that the cable from the 8-bin Mailbox is plugged
into the printer C-link connector. If not, turn the printer off,
plug the cable into the C-link connector, then turn the
printer back on. See page 255 for cabling configurations.
z Make sure that all bins are properly installed.
z If the printer still does not recognize the 8-bin Mailbox,
contact your dealer or authorized HP service provider.
z Make sure that you are using the supported paper weights
Paper jams and paper
feeding problems.
(page 330).
z Do not pull paper out of the bins while printing.
z Check cables and connectors between the printer and the
mailbox. See page 255 for cabling configurations.
z Repeated paper jams in the multibin mailbox area might
indicate that the printer and multibin mailbox are set up on
an uneven floor. Remove the toner cartridges, and then
move the printer to a level location. Reinstall the toner
cartridges.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
252
Situation
Solution
z Verify that the correct output bin is selected in the printer
driver. For more information on changing printer driver
settings, see the online help.
Paper is not going to the
correct output bin.
z The paper does not meet the specifications for the output
bin. See page 330 for more information on paper
specifications.
z If you are trying to send print jobs to an optional multibin
mailbox, verify that the multibin mailbox has been installed
on the printer and in the printer driver. Also verify the
multibin mailbox mode, which will affect the print job
destination.
z Verify that the power cord is firmly plugged into both the
multibin mailbox and the power receptacle. Remove and
reconnect the power cord.
The multibin mailbox will
not power on.
z Make sure that the cable from the multibin mailbox is
plugged into the printer C-link connector. If not, turn the
printer off, plug the cable into the C-link connector, then
turn the printer back on. See page 255 for cabling
configurations.
z Verify that the cables are firmly attached to the printer.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
253
Problems with the Optional 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that the 7-bin Mailbox has been configured in the
printer driver. See page 56 for more information on
Printer does not
recognize the mailbox.
z Make sure that the C-link cable is properly connected. See
page 255 for cabling configurations.
z Make sure that all bins are properly installed.
z If the printer still does not recognize the 7-bin Mailbox,
contact your dealer or authorized HP service provider.
z Make sure that you are using the supported paper weights
Paper jams and paper
feeding problems.
(page 330).
z Do not pull paper out of the bins while printing.
z Check cables and connectors between the printer and the
mailbox. See page 255 for cabling configurations.
z Repeated paper jams in the multibin mailbox area might
indicate that the printer and multibin mailbox are set up on
an uneven floor. Move the printer to a level location.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
254
Problems with the Optional 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Verify that the correct output bin is selected in the printer
driver. For more information on changing printer driver
settings, see the online help.
Paper is not going to the
correct output bin.
z The paper does not meet the specifications for the output
bin. See page 330 for more information on paper
specifications.
z If you are trying to send print jobs to an optional multibin
mailbox, verify that the multibin mailbox has been installed
multibin mailbox mode, which will affect the print job
destination.
z Verify that the power cord is firmly plugged into both the
multibin mailbox and the power receptacle. Remove and
reconnect the power cord.
The multibin mailbox will
not power on.
z Make sure that the C-link cable is properly connected. See
page 255 for cabling configurations.
z Verify that the cables are firmly attached to the printer.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
257
Problems with the Optional Duplex Printing Accessory
Situation
Solution
z Turn the printer off. Remove and re-install the unit. Turn the
Printer does not
recognize the duplexer.
printer on.
z Make sure that the duplexer has been configured in the
printer driver.
z Print a configuration page to check that the unit is present.
z Check that the duplexer is installed.
Job did not duplex.
Duplexer jams.
z Make sure the duplexer has been configured in the printer
driver.
z Make sure that the software is not overriding the printer
driver setting.
z Make sure that you are using the supported paper weights
(page 330).
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
258
Problems with the Optional Envelope Feeder
Situation
Solution
z Make sure the envelopes are within the specifications listed
Envelope jams and
envelope feeding
problems.
on page 343.
z Make sure the envelopes are properly loaded.
z Make sure the envelope weight on the feeder is down.
z Make sure the Optional Envelope Feeder extension is fully
pulled out.
Multiple envelopes feed The first envelope to be fed must be closer to the pick up roller
into the printer.
than the others.
z Make sure you are not overloading the envelope feeder.
No envelopes are fed into
the printer.
z When loading the envelopes, be sure to push them all the
way down to touch the rollers.
z Turn the printer off, remove and re-install the Optional
Printer does not
recognize the Optional
Envelope Feeder.
Envelope Feeder, then turn the printer back on.
z Make sure the Optional Envelope Feeder has been
configured in the printer driver. See page 59 for more
information on accessing the printer driver.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
259
Printer Hard Disk
Situation
Solution
Printer does not
Turn the printer off and verify that the hard disk is inserted
recognize the hard disk. correctly and is securely fastened.
Disk is not initialized.
DISK x NOT
Use the Windows-based HP LaserJet Resource Manager or
the Macintosh-based HP LaserJet Utility to initialize the disk.
INITIALIZED
Disk failure.
EIO x DISK
Turn the printer off and make sure that the EIO disk is inserted
correctly and securely fastened. If the control panel message
continues to be displayed, the disk drive needs to be replaced.
NOT FUNCTIONING
Disk is write protected.
DISK IS
Fonts and forms cannot be stored on the disk when the disk is
write protected. Use the Windows-based HP LaserJet
Resource Manager or the Macintosh-based HP LaserJet
Utility to remove the write protection from the disk.
WRITE PROTECTED
Attempted to use a
If you are using PCL, print the PCL Font Page, and verify that
disk-resident font, but the the font is on the disk. If you are using PS, print the PS Font
printout substituted a
different font.
Page and make sure that the font is on the disk. If the font is
not on the disk, use the HP LaserJet Resource Manager or the
Macintosh-based HP LaserJet Utility to download the font.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
260
PS Troubleshooting
Situation
Solution
A text listing of PS
The control panel PERSONALITY=AUTO setting may have been
commands prints instead confused by a nonstandard PS code. Check the PERSONALITY
of your PS printing job.
setting to see if it is set to PS or PCL. If it is set to PCL, set it to
PERSONALITY=AUTO. If it is set to AUTO, set it to PSfor this print job
only. When the job has printed, return the setting to AUTO.
z The requested typeface is not available in the printer or is
not present on the disk. Use a font download utility to
download the desired font.
The job prints in Courier
(the printer’s default
font) instead of the font
you requested.
z Fonts downloaded to memory are lost when the printer is
turned off. They are also lost if Resource Saving is not used
and a personality switch is performed to print a PCL job.
Disk fonts are not affected by PCL jobs or by turning the
printer off.
z Print a PS Font Page to verify that the font is available. If a
disk font appears to be missing, it may be because a
software utility was used to delete the font, because the
disk was re-initialized, or because the disk drive is not
installed correctly. Print a configuration page to verify that
the disk drive is installed and functioning correctly.
z Print a Disk Directory to help identify available fonts.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
261
PS Troubleshooting (continued)
Situation
Solution
A page prints with clipped If the page margins are clipped, you may have to print the
margins.
page at 300-dpi resolution or install more memory. Also try
turning off Resource Saving and I/O Buffering.
A page fails to print.
PS error page. If this does not identify the problem, try turning
off Resource Saving and I/O Buffering or installing more
memory. (See page 282 for more information about PS
printing.)
z Make sure the print job is a PS job.
A PS error page prints.
z Check to see whether your software expected you to send a
setup or PS header file to the printer.
z Check the printer setup in your software application to make
sure that the printer is selected.
z Check cable connections to ensure that they are secure.
z Reduce the complexity of the graphic.
z Add available memory by turning on Resource Saving.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
262
Computer, Network, or I/O Port Problems
Situation
Solution
Printer Interface
problems.
Print a configuration page from the printer’s control panel to
verify that the interface configurations shown on the printout
match those on the host computer. (See page 278 to print a
configuration page.)
Computer software
problem.
Check that your computer is working correctly by printing from
a software application you know works or by printing a plain
text file to see if the problem is with your software application
or printer driver. (For example, C:\dir>>LPTnwhere nis the
number of the computer port the printer is connected to, for
example LPT1.) To output the page, you may have to send a
form feed command from your computer.
Software is selecting the Check your operating system’s port settings to be sure the
wrong port.
print job is being sent to the correct port (for example, LPT1).
Printer port problem.
Check that your computer’s port is configured and working
properly. One way to check this is to connect another printer
to that port on your computer and print an application you
know works.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
263
Computer, Network, or I/O Port Problems (continued)
Situation
Solution
Network or shared printer Check for network or shared printer problems by connecting
problems.
your computer directly to the printer and printing from an
application you know works. If you suspect network problems,
documentation that came with your printer network cards.
z Add a Mode command to your computer’s AUTOEXEC.BAT
file for the parallel port. It should be inserted immediately
following the PATH statement:
Computer displays DOS
messages such as: Write
Fault Error Writing Device
LPTn: Abort, Retry,
Ignore?
For DOS versions below 4.0, add: MODE LPT1:,,P
For DOS versions 4.0 and above, add: MODE LPT1:,,B
z The I/O cable might be faulty; see Printing is Incomplete or
Incorrect on page 235.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
264
HP Fast InfraRed Connect Problems
Situation
Solution
z Make sure that the printer is in READYmode and that the FIR
port you are printing from is IRDA-compliant and within the
range of operation described in Printing a Job on page 161.
FIR port status indicator
does not light up.
z Make sure that the HP Fast InfraRed Connect is properly
connected to the printer.
z Run the printer Self Test. Make sure that FIR POD (IRDA
Compliant) is printed under Installed Personalities and
Options.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
265
HP Fast InfraRed Connect Problems (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Use a device that is IRDA-compliant; look for an IRDA
symbol on the device or see the computer’s user guide for
IRDA specifications.
Connection cannot be
established or seems to
take longer than usual.
z Make sure that the operating system on your computer
includes an FIR driver and your application uses an
HP LaserJet 8100 N, 8100 DN, or compatible driver. (Note
that complex pages take longer to print.)
z Position the HP Fast InfraRed Connect within the range of
operation described in Printing a Job on page 161, and
make sure that no object is blocking the connection. (This
object could be a hand, paper, books, or even bright light.)
z Make sure that the two FIR ports are clean (free from dirt
and grease).
z Bright light of any kind (sunlight, incandescent light,
fluorescent light, or light from an infrared remote control,
such as those used for TVs and VCRs) shining directly into
one of the FIR ports might cause interference. Make sure
that no bright light is shining directly into either FIR port.
z Position the portable device closer to the FIR port on the
printer.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
266
HP Fast InfraRed Connect Problems (continued)
Situation
Solution
The printer prints only part
of a page or document.
The connection has been broken during transmission. If you
move the portable device during transmission, the connection
can be broken. IRDA-compliant devices are designed to
recover from temporary connection interruptions. You have up
to 40 seconds to re-establish the connection (depending on
the portable device being used).
The print job has been
properly sent, but the printer
will not print.
If the connection is broken before the entire print job has been
transmitted to the printer (printing has not yet started), the
printer may not print any of the job. Press J
C
OB ANCEL
to clear
the printer’s memory. Then, reposition the portable device
within the range of operation described in Printing a Job on
page 161, and print the job again.
The FIR status indicator
turns off during
transmission.
The connection might have been broken. Press J
C
OB ANCEL
to
clear the printer’s memory. Then, reposition the portable device
within the range of operation described in Printing a Job on
page 161, and print the job again.
PS print job will not print.
Check the configuration in the PostScript Tab of Windows:
check that Protocol is set to AppleTalk and Binary Data is not
selected.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
267
Macintosh Problem Solving
Situation
Solution
z Make sure the printer’s control panel displays READY.
The Macintosh computer
is not communicating with
the printer.
z Make sure the correct printer driver is selected in the left
half of the Chooser. Then make sure that the desired printer
name is selected (highlighted) on the right half of the
Chooser. There will be an icon next to the printer name after
the driver has been set up and configured with the PPD.
z If the printer resides on a network with multiple zones, make
sure the correct zone is selected in the AppleTalk Zones
box in the Chooser.
z Make sure the correct printer has been chosen in the
Chooser by printing a configuration page (page 278). Make
sure the name of the printer displayed on the configuration
page matches the printer in the Chooser.
z Make sure AppleTalk is active. (Select this in the Chooser or
in the AppleTalk control panel, whichever is applicable for
your OS version.)
z Make sure the computer and printer are on the same
network. From Control Panels in the Apple menu, select the
Network (or the AppleTalk) control panel and then choose
the correct network (for example, LocalTalk or EtherTalk).
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
268
Macintosh Problem Solving (continued)
Situation
Solution
z Set up the printer manually by selecting Configure.
z Reinstall the printer software (page 67).
z Select an alternate PPD (page 269).
Auto Setup did not
automatically set up the
printer.
z The PPD might have been renamed. If so, select the
renamed PPD (page 269).
z A network queue might be present.
The printer driver icon
does not appear in the
Chooser.
Make sure the Apple LaserWriter 8 Chooser extension resides
in the Extensions folder. If it is not present anywhere on your
system, reinstall the HP printer software or call HP Customer
Care.
The print job is not sent Another printer with the same or similar name might have
to the desired printer.
received the print job. Make sure that the printer name
matches the name selected in the Chooser (page 269).
z If you are printing an .EPS file, try downloading the fonts
contained in the .EPS file to the printer before printing. Use
the HP LaserJet Utility (page 76).
The print job has
incorrect fonts.
z If the document is not printing with New York, Geneva, or
Monaco fonts, go into the Page Setup dialog box, and select
Options to deselect substituted fonts.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
269
Selecting an alternate PPD
1 Open the Chooser from the Apple menu.
2 Click the LaserWriter icon.
3 If you are on a network with multiple zones, select the zone in the AppleTalk
Zones box where the printer is located.
4 Click the printer name you want to use in the Select a PostScript Printer box.
(Double-clicking will immediately generate the next few steps.)
5 Click Setup... (This button might read Create for first-time setup.)
6 Click Select PPD....
7 Find the desired PPD in the list and click Select. If the desired PPD is not
listed, choose one of the following options:
Š Select a PPD for a printer with similar features.
Š Select a PPD from another folder.
Š Select the generic PPD by clicking Use Generic. The generic PPD allows
you to print, but limits your access to printer features.
8 In the Setup dialog box, click Select, and then click OK to return to the
Chooser.
Continued on next page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
270
Note
If you manually select a PPD, an icon might not appear next to the selected
printer in the Select a PostScript Printer box. In the Chooser, click Setup,
click Printer Info, and then click Update Info to bring up the icon.
9 Close the Chooser.
Renaming the Printer
If you are going to rename the printer, do this before selecting the printer in
the Chooser. If you rename the printer after selecting it in the Chooser, you will
have to go back into the Chooser and reselect it.
Use the Set Printer Name feature in the HP LaserJet Utility to rename the
printer.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
271
Communicating with an Optional HP JetDirect 600N
Print Server
If the printer contains an optional HP JetDirect internal print server, and you
cannot communicate with the printer over the network, verify operation of the
print server. Check the JetDirect Configuration Page for the message I/O CARD
READY. (Follow the steps on page 278 to print a configuration page.) For
troubleshooting information, see the HP JetDirect software installation guide.
HP JetDirect 600N Print Server
If the printer contains an optional HP JetDirect 600N print server, check to see
that the print server was able to link to the network.
z Check the link-speed LEDs (10 or 100) on the print server. If both are off,
the card failed to link to the network.
Continued on next page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
272
z Check the JetDirect Configuration Page for a LOSS OF CARRIER error
message. This message also indicates that the card did not link to the
network.
Note
The HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server may require up to 10 seconds
to establish a link to the network.
If the print server failed to link, verify that all cables are correctly connected. If
the print server still fails to link, follow the steps below to reconfigure the print
server.
Continued on next page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
273
1 Remove the HP JetDirect 10/100TX print server.
2 Use jumpers P1, P2, and P3 to manually configure the print server for
either 10 or 100 MB per second link speed, and Full-duplex or Half-duplex
operation according to the table starting on page 274.
Continued on next page.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
276
3 Reinstall the print server.
4 Verify that the configuration of the connecting network device (such as a
10/100TX network switch) matches. For example, to set the print server for
100TX Full-duplex operation, the port on the network switch must also be
set for 100TX Full-duplex operation.
5 Turn the printer off and back on.
6 Check the print server operation. If the print server fails to link, contact a
local authorized HP dealer or service representative.
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
277
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
From the printer’s control panel, you can print pages that give details about the
printer and its current configuration. The following information pages are
described here:
z Configuration Page
z Menu Map
z PCL or PS Font List
For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, see the Information
Menu in the printer’s control panel (page 358).
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
278
Configuration Page
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help
troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories,
such as memory (DIMMs), input and output paper handling devices, and
printer languages.
Note
If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed, a JetDirect configuration
page will print out as well.
To print a configuration page:
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until INFORMATION MENU appears.
ENU
repeatedly until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears.
TEM
3 Press S
to print the configuration page.
ELECT
Numbers in the sample printout match the numbers in the printer messages
(page 199). The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the
options currently installed in the printer.
Continued on next page.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
279
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
1 Printer Information lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page
counts, and other information for the printer. If the variable fuser mode has
been set to HIGH1, HIGH2, or HIGH3, the number of pages printed at the high
fuser temperature is listed in parentheses after the page count.
2 Event Log lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of
entries viewable, and the last three entries.
Continued on next page.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
280
3 Installed Personalities and Options lists all printer languages that are
installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists options that are installed in each
DIMM slot and EIO slot.
4 Memory lists the printer memory, Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O
buffering and resource saving information.
5 Security lists the status of the printer’s control panel lock, control panel
password, and disk drive.
6 Paper Trays and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists optional
paper handling accessories that are installed.
7 Toner Level provides a graphic representation of how much toner is left in
the cartridge.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
281
Menu Map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the control
panel, print a control panel menu map:
1 Press M
repeatedly until INFORMATION MENU appears.
ENU
2 Press I
repeatedly until PRINT MENU MAP appears.
TEM
3 Press S
to print the menu map.
ELECT
You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference. The
content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed
in the printer. (Many of these values can be overridden from the printer driver
or software application.)
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see page 354.
To change a control panel setting, see page 52.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
282
PCL or PS Font List
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the printer. (The
font lists also show which fonts are resident on an optional hard disk or flash
DIMM.)
To print a PCL or PS font list:
1 Press M
2 Press I
repeatedly until INFORMATION MENU appears.
ENU
repeatedly until PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST
TEM
appears.
3 Press S
to print the font list.
ELECT
The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed and gives a sample of those
fonts. The following describes the information that can be found on the PCL
font list:
z Font gives the font names and samples.
z Pitch/Point indicates the pitch or point size of the font.
z Escape Sequence (a PCL programming command) is used to select the
designated font. (See the legend at the bottom of the font list page.)
Note
For step-by-step instructions on using printer commands to select a font
with DOS applications, see page 412.
Continued on next page.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
283
z Font # is the number used to select fonts from the printer’s control panel
(not the software application). Do not confuse the font # with the font ID,
described below. The number indicates the DIMM slot where the font is
stored.
Š SOFT: Downloaded fonts that stay resident in the printer until other fonts
are downloaded to replace them or until the printer is turned off.
Š INTERNAL: Fonts that permanently reside in the printer.
z Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you download them
through software.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
284
File Directory Page
1
2
3
1 Disk Information indicates the disk model number, serial number, capacity,
available free space, and whether you may write to the disk.
2 File Size column lists the size of each file under the Directory/File Name
column. If a directory is listed on the line, then Directory appears in this
column and its path is listed in the Directory/File Name column.
3 Directory/File Name lists the name of the file. Files in a subdirectory are
listed right after the directory line. The files are not necessarily listed in
alphabetic order.
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 5
Problem Solving
285
Event Log Page
1
2
6
5
3
4
1 Current Page Count lists the number of printed pages from the printer.
2 Number indicates the order in which the errors occurred. The last error to
occur has the highest number.
3 Error lists the internal error code for each error.
4 Page Count indicates the number of printed pages from the printer when the
error occurred.
5 Description or Personality indicates whether the error occurred due to a
problem within a printer personality or a printer jam.
6 Serial Number shows the serial number of the printer
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
Chapter 6
Service and Support
287
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
DURATION OF WARRANTY
HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N, 8100 DN 1 year, on-site
1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in
materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives
notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option,
either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement
products may be either new or like-new.
2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming
instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and
workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of
such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media
which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted
or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace
any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a
refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in
performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
5. The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of
installation if installed by HP. If customer schedules or delays HP
installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st
day from delivery.
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
Chapter 6
Service and Support
288
6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or
inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or
supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d)
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the
product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR
ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the
greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the
subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the
extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent
jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product.
9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT
WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR
DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST
PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
10.FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND;
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO
THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT
OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY
RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
Chapter 6
Service and Support
289
Service During and After the Warranty Period
z If printer hardware fails during the warranty period, contact an HP-
authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Customer Care pages at
the front of this user guide.)
z If printer hardware fails after the warranty period, and you have an
HP Maintenance Agreement or HP SupportPack, request service as
specified in the agreement.
z If you do not have an HP Maintenance Agreement or HP SupportPack,
contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the
HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide.)
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
Chapter 6
Service and Support
290
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life
Note
The warranty below applies to the toner cartridge that came with this
printer.
This warranty supersedes all previous warranties (7/19/96).
HP toner cartridges are warranted to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship until the HP toner is depleted. The warranty covers any defects
or malfunctions in a new Hewlett-Packard toner cartridge.
How long does
the coverage
last?
The coverage lasts until the HP toner is depleted, at which time
the warranty expires.
How do I know
when the HP
toner is running
out?
The TONER LOW message on the printer’s control panel display
provides the first indication that toner is low. (Toner will likely run
out in the next 100-300 sheets of paper.)
What will HP do? HP will, at HP’s option, either replace products which prove to be
defective or refund the purchase price. If possible, please attach a
print-out sample illustrating what the defective cartridge is
printing.
What does this
warranty not
cover?
The warranty does not cover cartridges which have been refilled,
are emptied, are abused, are misused, or are tampered with in any
way.
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life
Chapter 6
Service and Support
291
How do I return
the faulty
cartridge?
In the event the cartridge proves to be defective, return the
cartridge to the place of purchase, where the cartridge will be
replaced (include a print sample illustrating the defect).
How does State,
Province or
Country Law
apply?
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to
province, or country to country. This limited warranty is the sole
warranty on the HP toner cartridge and supersedes any other
warranty relating to this product.
IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS
WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life
Chapter 6
Service and Support
292
HP Software License Terms
ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE
LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE
LICENSE TERMS, YOU MAY RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. IF
THE SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN
THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND.
The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying Software
unless you have a separate signed agreement with HP.
License Grant
HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the Software. “Use” means storing,
loading, installing, executing, or displaying the Software. You may not modify
the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software. If the
Software is licensed for “concurrent use”, you may not allow more than the
maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently.
Ownership
The Software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your
license confers no title to, or ownership in, the Software and is not a sale of
any rights in the Software. HP’s third party suppliers may protect their rights in
the event of any violation of these License Terms.
HP Software License Terms
Chapter 6
Service and Support
293
Copies and Adaptations
You may only make copies or adaptations of the Software for archival purposes
or when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the
Software. You must reproduce all copyright notices in the original Software on
all copies or adaptations. You may not copy the Software onto any public
network.
No Disassembly or Decryption
You may not disassemble or decompile the Software unless HP’s prior written
consent is obtained. In some jurisdictions, HP’s consent may not be required
for limited disassembly or decompilation. Upon request, you will provide HP
with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly or
decompilation. You may not decrypt the Software unless decryption is a
necessary part of the operation of the Software.
Transfer
Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the Software.
Upon transfer, you must deliver the Software, including any copies and related
documentation, to the transferee. The transferee must accept these License
Terms as a condition to the transfer.
HP Software License Terms
Chapter 6
Service and Support
294
Termination
HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of
these License Terms. Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the
Software, together with all copies, adaptations, and merged portions in any
form.
Export Requirements
You may not export or reexport the Software or any copy or adaptation in
violation of any applicable laws or regulations.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
The Software and any accompanying documentation have been developed
entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial
computer software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS
252.211-7015 (May 1991), or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a
“commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101 (a), or as “Restricted computer
software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent agency
regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those
rights provided for such Software and any accompanying documentation by the
applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for
the product involved.
HP Software License Terms
Chapter 6
Service and Support
295
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Note
Before calling an HP Sales and Service office, be sure to contact the
appropriate Customer Care Center number listed in the HP Customer Care
section. Products should not be returned to these offices. Product return
information is also available through the appropriate Customer Care Center
listed in the HP Customer Care section.
Austria
Europe
9KGPꢀ
Albania
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)GUꢁOꢁDꢁ*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
.KGDNICUUGꢋ
ꢋꢄꢄꢄꢀ8KGPPC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢃꢄꢆꢅꢅꢅꢑꢌꢅꢅꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢃꢄꢆꢅꢅꢅꢑꢎꢆꢆꢇꢀ
)GPGTꢑ#NꢀUJꢁRꢁMꢁꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
6KTCPCꢀ6TCFGꢀ%GPVTG
4Tꢁꢀ &WTTGUKV
6KTCPC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢉꢊꢆꢆꢑꢈꢄꢑꢄꢊꢆꢋꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢊꢆꢆꢑꢈꢄꢑꢄꢌꢍꢎꢎꢀ
Belarus
$GNJCTFꢀ
ꢌꢅꢍꢒꢀꢄꢀ/GNPKEC[VGꢀ5VTGGV
/KPUMꢀꢄꢄꢅꢎꢅꢅꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢌꢆꢑꢋꢌꢄꢑꢄꢊꢇꢍꢇꢆꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢌꢆꢑꢋꢌꢄꢑꢄꢎꢇꢈꢄꢎꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
296
Belgium
Cyprus
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ$GNIKWOꢀ
5ꢁ#ꢁꢃ0ꢁ8ꢁꢀ
$QWNGXCTFꢀFGꢀNCꢀ9QNWYGꢀꢋꢅꢅꢑꢋꢅꢄ
$ꢀꢋꢄꢅꢅꢀ$TWUUGNU
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢄꢃꢄꢐꢀꢌꢌꢇꢑꢊꢈꢑꢋꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢄꢃꢄꢐꢀꢌꢌꢇꢑꢊꢈꢑꢋꢈꢀ
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ)ꢑ5[UVGOUꢒꢀ)TGGEGꢀ
Czech Republic
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ
%GUMQUNQXGPUMKꢀUTQ
0QXQFXQTUMCꢀꢇꢄ
ꢋꢈꢄꢅꢅꢀ2TCJCꢀꢈꢋꢈꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢉꢈꢄꢅꢑꢄꢑꢈꢌꢈꢀꢊꢄꢍꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢈꢄꢅꢑꢄꢑꢈꢌꢈꢀꢊꢄꢍꢊꢀ
Bulgaria
5ꢓ6ꢀ$WNICTKCꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
ꢄꢒꢀꢔ+CVCUJMCꢔꢀ5Vꢁ
Denmark
5QHKCꢀꢋꢎꢋꢇ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢉꢊꢆꢍꢑꢄꢑꢍꢆꢆꢀꢍꢆꢌꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢊꢆꢍꢑꢄꢑꢍꢆꢆꢀꢍꢄꢍꢅꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ#ꢃ5ꢀ
-QPIGXGLGPꢀꢄꢆ
&-ꢑꢊꢈꢎꢅꢀ$KTMGTQF
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢈꢆꢐꢀꢈꢆꢀꢍꢍꢑꢋꢅꢑꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢈꢆꢐꢀꢈꢆꢑꢇꢄꢑꢅꢎꢑꢊꢅꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂ
Croatia (local name:
Hrvatska)
VGUVAOGCUWTGOGPV"JRꢁFMꢀ
*GTOGUꢑ2NWUꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
5NCPFTQXGꢀꢄ
5'ꢀꢋꢄꢊꢋꢀ%TPWEG
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢇꢑꢆꢋꢄꢀꢊꢊꢋꢅꢎꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢇꢑꢆꢋꢄꢀꢊꢊꢋꢍꢊꢅꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
297
Finland
Germany
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ1[ꢀ
5VTGGVꢀ#FFTGUUꢂ
2KKURCPMCNNKQPVKGꢀꢋꢌ
ꢅꢄꢄꢅꢅꢀ'5211
(KPNCPF
$ÌDNKPIGPꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
2QUVHCEJꢀꢋꢈꢀꢊꢅ
ꢌꢋꢅꢅꢈꢀ$ÌDNKPIGP
2ꢁ1ꢁ$QZꢀ#FFTGUUꢂ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢎꢇ
ꢅꢄꢄꢅꢋꢀ'5211
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢀꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢀꢊꢋꢀ
$CFꢀ*QODWTIꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5VTC-Gꢀꢋ
ꢎꢋꢊꢆꢄꢀ$CFꢀ*QODWTI
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
Finland
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢆꢇꢑꢍꢑꢇꢇꢌꢄꢀꢄꢋꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢆꢇꢑꢍꢑꢇꢇꢌꢄꢀꢄꢍꢄꢊꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂꢀ
VOQFKTGEV"HKPNCPFꢁJRꢁEQOꢀ
Berlin
France
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
.ÒV\QYRNCV\ꢀꢋꢆ
ꢋꢅꢌꢇꢆꢀ$GTNKP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ(TCPEGꢀ
6GUVꢀGVꢀ/GUWTG
<ꢁ#ꢁꢀFGꢀ%QWTVCDQGWH
ꢋꢀ#XGPWGꢀFWꢀ%CPCFC
ꢍꢋꢍꢈꢌꢀ.GUꢀ7NKU
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢀꢎꢍꢀꢄꢍꢀꢈꢋꢀꢋꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢀꢎꢍꢀꢄꢍꢀꢎꢆꢀꢅꢍꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
298
Hamburg
Müchen
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
ªDGTUGGTKPIꢀꢋꢎ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
'UEJGPUVTC-Gꢀꢆ
ꢄꢄꢄꢍꢌꢀ*CODWTI
ꢇꢄꢅꢄꢈꢀ6CWHMKTEJGP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
0ÒTPDGTIꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
'OOGTKEJGTꢀ5VTC-Gꢀꢋꢊ
ꢍꢅꢈꢋꢋꢀ0ÒTPDGTI
Hannover
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
$CWOUEJWNGPCNNGGꢀꢄꢅꢑꢄꢄ
ꢊꢅꢎꢄꢆꢀ*CPPQXGT
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
Ratingen
Leipzig
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
2GORGNHWTVꢀ5VTC-Gꢀꢋ
ꢈꢅꢇꢇꢄꢀ4CVKPIGP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
9GJNKV\GTꢀ5VTCUUGꢀꢄ
ꢅꢈꢈꢊꢆꢀ5EJMGWFKV\
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
299
Waldbronn
Hungary
(Karlsruhe)
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ/CI[CTQTU\CIꢀ
-(6ꢁꢀ'T\U¾DGV
MKT±N[PGꢀÐVLCꢀꢋꢃE
ꢋꢋꢈꢎꢀ$WFCRGUV
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢎꢐꢀꢋꢀꢈꢎꢋꢇꢋꢋꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢎꢐꢀꢋꢀꢈꢎꢋꢇꢄꢄꢄꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢑ5VTꢁꢀꢇ
ꢌꢎꢊꢊꢌꢀ9CNFDTQPP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢇꢅꢃꢆꢄꢈꢑꢎꢊꢊꢋꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ)OD*ꢀ
*GTTGPDGTIGTꢀ5VTC-Gꢀꢋꢊꢅ
ꢌꢅꢊꢅꢀ$ÌDNKPIGP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢈꢍꢐꢀꢌꢅꢊꢋꢃꢋꢈꢑꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢈꢍꢐꢀꢌꢅꢊꢋꢃꢋꢈꢑꢄꢍꢍꢍꢀ
Ireland
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+TGNCPFꢀ.KOKVGFꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ*QWUG
5VTCFDTQQMꢀ4QCF
$NCEMTQEMꢒꢀ%Qꢁꢀ
&WDNKPꢀ+TGNCPF
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢀꢎꢋꢆꢀꢇꢄꢄꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢀꢄꢇꢈꢀꢆꢋꢊꢈꢀ
Greece
)ꢑ5[UVGOUꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
ꢌꢎꢒꢀ;OKVVQWꢀ5VTGGV
Italy
ꢋꢋꢎꢊꢈꢀ#VJGPU
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢌꢄꢎꢈꢅꢈꢆꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢌꢄꢎꢈꢅꢄꢅꢀ
0CRQNKꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+VCNKCPCꢀ5ꢁRꢁ#ꢁ
8KCꢀ'OCPWGNGꢀ)KCPVWTEQꢒꢀꢍꢄꢃ)
ꢇꢅꢋꢈꢎꢀ0CRQNKꢀꢏ0Cꢐ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢇꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢑꢈꢅꢑꢋꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢇꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢑꢈꢅꢑꢄꢋꢎꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
300
Roma Eur
Milan
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+VCNKCPCꢀ5ꢁRꢁ#ꢁ
8KCNGꢀFGNꢀ6KPVQTGVVQꢒꢀꢄꢅꢅ
ꢅꢅꢋꢈꢄꢀ4QOCꢀ'WT
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢄꢐꢀꢍꢄꢑꢋꢄꢄꢑꢄꢈꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢄꢐꢀꢍꢄꢑꢋꢅꢈꢀꢅꢎꢍꢀ
-C\CMJUVCP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢎꢐꢀꢆꢈꢑꢇꢊꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢎꢐꢀꢆꢈꢑꢅꢋꢑꢎꢎꢋꢀ
5ECPꢀ'CUVꢀ
-CTCUCVꢑ$CV[TꢀUVTGGVꢀꢇꢄ
#NOCV[ꢀꢈꢇꢅꢅꢋꢄ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢌꢑꢊꢄꢌꢄꢑꢎꢄꢄꢅꢄꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢌꢑꢊꢄꢌꢄꢑꢎꢄꢋꢇꢈꢊꢀ
Torino
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+VCNKCPCꢀ5ꢁRꢁ#ꢁ
8KCꢀ2TCINKCꢀꢋꢆ
ꢋꢅꢅꢈꢈꢀ2KCPG\\Cꢀꢏ6Qꢐ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢍꢃꢋꢋꢐꢀꢑꢀꢍꢎꢇꢆꢁꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢅꢃꢋꢋꢐꢀꢑꢀꢍꢎꢇꢁꢆꢇꢍꢍꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+VCNKCPCꢀ5ꢁRꢁ#ꢁꢀ
(QTꢀKPHQTOCVKQPꢀQPꢀCP[ꢀRTQFWEVUꢀQTꢀ
UGTXKEGUꢀECNNꢂꢀꢅꢄꢀꢍꢄꢀꢋꢄꢄꢀꢄꢈꢋꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+VCNKCPCꢀ5ꢁRꢁ#ꢁ
8KCꢀ)ꢁꢀFKꢀ8KVVQTKQꢀꢍ
Macedonia, The
Former Yugo-slav
Republic of
*GTOGUꢑ2NWUꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
%GNQXUMCꢀꢌꢊ
ꢎꢋꢅꢅꢅꢀ.LWDNLCPC
5NQXGPKC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢎꢋꢃꢋꢍꢊꢊꢄꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢎꢋꢃꢆꢆꢆꢍꢌꢀ
ꢄꢅꢅꢎꢊꢀ%GTPWFUEQꢀUꢃ0
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
301
Netherlands
Poland
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ0GFGTNCPFꢀ$ꢁ8ꢁꢀ
2QUVDQZꢀꢎꢎꢌ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ2QNUMCꢀ
1EJQVCꢀ2CTMꢀ1HHKEG
ꢋꢋꢇꢅꢀ#4ꢀ#OUVGNXGGP
0GVJGTNCPFU
#NGLGꢀ,GTQ\QNKOUMKGꢀꢋꢇꢋꢀꢅꢄꢑꢄꢄꢄ
9CTU\CYC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢋꢃꢄꢅꢐꢀꢆꢈꢌꢑꢎꢎꢎꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢋꢃꢄꢅꢐꢀꢆꢈꢌꢑꢌꢌꢎꢆꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢉꢈꢇꢀꢏꢅꢄꢄꢐꢀꢎꢅꢇꢌꢌꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢈꢇꢀꢏꢅꢄꢄꢐꢀꢎꢅꢇꢌꢎꢅꢅꢀ
Norway
Portugal
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ0QTIGꢀ#5ꢀ
&TCOOGPUXGKGPꢀꢋꢎꢍ
2QUVDQMUꢀꢎꢅꢀ5MÉ[GP
0ꢑꢅꢄꢋꢄꢀ15.1
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ2QTVWICNꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
#Xꢁꢀ/CTIKPCNꢒꢀ'Fꢁꢀ2CTSWGꢀ1EGCPQ
2KUQꢀꢆuꢑ)ꢑ5Vuꢀ#OCTQꢀFGꢀ1GKTCU
ꢄꢌꢇꢅꢀ1GKTCU
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢆꢊꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢇꢄꢀꢇꢆꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢆꢊꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢈꢋꢑꢌꢅꢌꢋꢀ
Norway
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢉꢈꢌꢀꢄꢄꢀꢌꢊꢀꢆꢌꢀꢆꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢈꢌꢀꢄꢄꢀꢌꢊꢀꢆꢎꢀꢋꢍꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂ
Romania
VGUVAOGCUWTGOGPV"
PQTYC[ꢁJRꢁEQO
5ꢓ6ꢀ4QOCPKCꢀ54.ꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
%GPVTWNꢀ5KVTCEQꢑ2NCVCꢀ7PKTKK
$Fꢁꢀ&KOKVTKGUꢀ%CPVGOKTꢀꢋ
'VCLꢀ++ꢑꢄꢋꢅꢀ5GEVQTꢀꢈ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
302
Bucuresti
Slovenia
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢈꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢌꢊꢄꢅꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂ
ꢏꢈꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢌꢄꢋꢌꢒꢀꢏꢈꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢌꢄꢋꢇꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢈꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢌꢊꢋꢅꢀ
*GTOGUꢑ2NWUꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
5NCPFTCCꢀꢄ
ꢋꢄꢊꢋꢀ.LWDNLCPCꢑ%TPWEG
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
5GTXKEGꢀ*QVꢀ.KPGꢂꢀꢏꢈꢅꢃꢋꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢌꢊꢅꢅꢀ
ꢏꢊꢇꢎꢐꢀꢎꢋꢑꢋꢇꢍꢆꢀꢄꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢇꢎꢐꢀꢎꢋꢀꢋꢇꢍꢆꢀꢄꢅꢋꢀ
Russian Federation
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%QORCP[ꢀ
4GRTGUGPVCVKXGꢀ1HHKEG
-QUOQFCOKCPUMC[Cꢀ
PCDGTG\JPC[Cꢀꢆꢄꢒꢀ$NFIꢁꢀꢋꢀ
ꢋꢋꢊꢅꢆꢈꢀ/QUEQYꢀ
Spain
Barcelona
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ'URCÇQNCꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁ
#XFCꢁꢀ&KCIQPCNꢒꢀꢎꢅꢆ
ꢅꢇꢅꢄꢇꢀ$CTEGNQPC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢈꢀꢍꢊꢀꢈꢅꢋꢀꢍꢋꢀꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢈꢀꢍꢊꢀꢈꢊꢅꢀꢇꢈꢀꢎꢇꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂ
ꢉꢌꢀꢏꢅꢍꢆꢐꢀꢍꢋꢎꢍꢇꢋꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢌꢀꢏꢅꢍꢆꢐꢀꢍꢋꢎꢇꢈꢇꢀ
5NQXCMKCꢀꢏ5NQXCMꢀ4GRWDNKEꢐ
S&T Slovakia
Madrid
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ&KUVTKDWVQT
2QNKCPM[ꢀꢆ
5-ꢀꢇꢈꢈꢀ,ꢈꢀ$TCVKUNCXC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢈꢄꢋꢐꢀꢌꢀꢌꢎꢆꢇꢍꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢈꢄꢋꢐꢀꢌꢀꢌꢎꢊꢈꢅꢇꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ'URCÇQNCꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁ
%TVCꢀ0ꢑ8+ꢀMOꢀꢋꢎꢒꢆꢅꢅ
ꢄꢇꢄꢊꢅꢀ.CUꢀ4Q\CUꢒꢀ/CFTKF
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢊꢈꢃꢍꢋꢐꢀꢎꢊꢋꢋꢊꢄꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢈꢃꢍꢋꢐꢀꢎꢊꢋꢋꢈꢎꢍꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
303
Sevilla
Sweden
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ'URCÇQNCꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁ
#XFCꢁꢀ.WKUꢀFGꢀ/QTCNGUꢒꢀꢊꢄ
'FKHKEQꢀ(QTWOꢒꢀRNCPVCꢀꢊꢓUWRCꢕꢒꢀ
OÈFWNQꢋ
ꢈꢋꢅꢋꢇꢀ5GXKNNC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢈꢑꢍꢆꢑꢈꢆꢆꢀꢄꢎꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢈꢑꢍꢆꢑꢈꢆꢆꢀꢄꢎꢄꢎꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5XGTKIGꢀ#$ꢀ
5MCNJQNVUICVCPꢀꢍ
ꢋꢎꢈꢀꢍꢌꢀ-KUVC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢈꢎꢃꢇꢐꢀꢈꢈꢈꢀꢄꢄꢀꢌꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢈꢎꢃꢇꢐꢀꢈꢈꢈꢀꢄꢆꢀꢄꢆꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂꢀVGUVꢑ
OGCUWTGOGPV"UYGFGPꢁJRꢁEQOꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5XGTKIGꢀ#$ꢀ
8·FWTUICVCPꢀꢎ
Valencia
$QZꢀꢆꢊꢄꢇ
5ꢑꢈꢅꢄꢀꢄꢌꢀ)¤6'$14)
5YGFGP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢈꢎꢃꢊꢋꢐꢀꢊꢆꢀꢋꢇꢀꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢈꢎꢃꢊꢋꢐꢀꢊꢆꢀꢋꢇꢀꢍꢍꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ'URCÇQNCꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁ
2NC\CꢀFGꢀ#O¾TKECꢒꢀꢄꢀꢄꢀ$
'FKHKEKQꢀ<WTKEJ
ꢈꢎꢅꢅꢈꢀ8CNGPEKC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢈꢑꢍꢎꢑꢊꢍꢇꢀꢄꢄꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢈꢑꢍꢎꢑꢊꢍꢇꢀꢄꢄꢊꢅꢀ
Switzerland
Vizcaya
$GTPGꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀꢏ5EJYGK\ꢐꢀ#)
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
/GTKGFYGIꢀꢋꢋ
ꢊꢋꢌꢄꢀ0KGFGTYCPIGPꢃ$GTP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢆꢀꢌꢄꢀꢊꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢆꢀꢌꢌꢀꢅꢊꢀ
#XFCꢀFGꢀ5WICC\CTVG
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ'URCÇQNCꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁ
#XFCꢀFGꢀ<WIC\CTVGꢒꢀꢇ
'FKHꢀ'Nꢀ#DTCꢒꢀꢈ
ꢈꢇꢍꢊꢅꢀ.CUꢀ#TGPCUꢒꢀ)WGEJQ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢈꢑꢍꢈꢑꢈꢇꢋꢀꢇꢅꢀꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢈꢑꢍꢈꢑꢈꢇꢋꢀꢇꢅꢀꢈꢅꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
304
Geneva
Turkey
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀꢏ5WKUUGꢐꢀ5#
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKMꢀꢊꢍꢒ
TWGꢀFGꢀ8G[TQV
#PMCTCꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTF
$KNIKUC[CTꢀXGꢀ1NEWOꢀ5KUVGONGTKꢀ
#ꢁ5ꢁ
ꢋꢄꢋꢌꢀ/G[TKPꢀꢋ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢆꢀꢌꢄꢀꢊꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢆꢀꢌꢌꢀꢅꢊꢀ
-CTWOꢀ+Uꢀ/GTMG\Kꢀ0Qꢂꢈꢎꢋꢀꢏ$ꢑ
#UCPUQTWꢐꢀ
+TCPꢀ%CFꢁ0Qꢁꢄꢋ
ꢅꢎꢎꢇꢅꢒꢀ-CXCMNKFGTGꢀꢑꢀ#PMCTC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢍꢅꢃꢊꢋꢄꢐꢀꢈꢎꢇꢀꢇꢌꢀꢌꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢅꢃꢊꢋꢄꢐꢀꢈꢎꢇꢀꢇꢌꢀꢌꢇꢀ
Zürich
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀꢏ5EJYGK\ꢐꢀ#)
'NGMVTQPKUEJGꢀ/G-VGEJPKM
+PꢀFGTꢀ.WDGT\GPꢀꢄꢍ
ꢇꢍꢅꢄꢀ7TFQTHꢃ<ÒTKEJ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢆꢀꢌꢄꢀꢊꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢌꢊꢆꢀꢌꢌꢀꢅꢊꢀ
Istanbul
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTF
$KNIKUC[CTꢀXGꢀ1NEWOꢀ5KUVGONGTKꢀ
#ꢁ5ꢁ
ꢋꢍꢀ/C[KUꢀECFFGUK
0QXCꢃ$CTCPꢀ2NC\Cꢀ-ꢁꢋꢄ
5KUNKꢀꢇꢅꢄꢄꢅ
+UVCPDWN
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢍꢅꢃꢄꢋꢄꢐꢀꢄꢄꢈꢀꢆꢍꢀꢄꢆꢀꢏꢋꢄꢀNKPGUꢐꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢅꢃꢄꢋꢄꢐꢀꢄꢄꢈꢀꢆꢍꢀꢊꢍꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
305
Ukraine
Uzbekistan
5ꢓ6ꢀ7MTCKPGꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢆꢅꢒꢀ2QRWFTGPMQꢀ5VTGGVꢀ
ꢄꢈꢊꢎꢎꢅꢀ-KGXꢀ
#$/ꢀ9QTNFYKFGꢀ6GEJPQNQIKGUꢀ
ꢋꢆꢒꢀ/QXCTCWPPCMJTꢀ5VTGGV
6CUJMGPVꢀꢌꢅꢅꢅꢎꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢇꢅꢑꢈꢈꢑꢆꢆꢍꢀꢈꢌꢎꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢇꢅꢑꢈꢈꢑꢆꢆꢍꢀꢆꢅꢊꢊꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢌꢑꢊꢌꢋꢄꢑꢋꢊꢊꢊꢎꢇꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢌꢑꢊꢌꢋꢄꢑꢈꢅꢎꢈꢇꢆꢀ
United Kingdom
Yugoslavia
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ.KOKVGFꢀꢏ6ꢈꢐꢀ
%CKPꢀ4QCF
+$+5ꢀ+PUVTWOGPVUꢀ
2CTKUMGꢀ-QOWPGꢀꢄꢄ
$TCEMPGNN
ꢋꢋꢅꢌꢅꢀ0ꢁ$GQITCF
$GTMUJKTG
4)ꢋꢄꢀꢋ*0
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢇꢋꢑꢋꢋꢑꢎꢅꢍꢎꢆꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢇꢋꢑꢋꢋꢑꢎꢍꢍꢎꢄꢌꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢋꢊꢈꢈꢀꢊꢎꢎꢎꢎꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢅꢋꢊꢈꢈꢀꢊꢎꢄꢇꢆꢄꢀ
%QPVCEVꢀ*2ꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂꢀ
WMVOQAUCNGU"JRꢁEQOꢀ
5GGꢀ7PKVGFꢀ-KPIFQO
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
306
Brazil
Latin America and South
America
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ$TCUKNꢀ
#NCOGFCꢀ4KQꢀ0GITQꢒꢀꢌꢆꢅ
ꢅꢎꢈꢆꢈꢑꢅꢅꢅꢑ#NRJCXKNNGꢑ$CTWGTKꢀ
5CQꢀ2CWNQꢒꢀ$TC\KNꢀ
Argentina
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ#TIGPVKPCꢀ
/QPVCPGUGUꢀꢄꢋꢈꢅ
ꢋꢈꢄꢇꢀ$WGPQUꢀ#KTGU
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢈꢀꢋꢐꢀꢌꢇꢌꢑꢌꢋꢋꢆꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢈꢀꢋꢐꢀꢌꢇꢌꢑꢌꢄꢇꢌꢀ
ꢏꢆꢆꢑꢋꢋꢐꢀꢌꢄꢍꢎꢑꢇꢋꢆꢆꢃꢇꢋꢎꢅꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂꢀ*2ꢀ
&+4'%6ꢂꢀꢅꢀꢇꢅꢅꢀꢋꢊꢅꢑꢄꢎꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢆꢑꢋꢋꢐꢀꢌꢄꢍꢎꢑꢇꢋꢌꢋꢀ
Belize
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ$TCUKNꢀ
4WCꢀ.CWTQꢀ/WGNNGTꢒꢀꢋꢋꢎ
)TWRQꢀꢇꢅꢊꢀ'FKHKEKQꢀ6QTTGꢀ4KQꢀ5WN
ꢄꢄꢄꢍꢅꢑꢋꢎꢅꢀ$QVCHQIQ
#VGPFKFQꢀRQTꢀ'Nꢀ5CNXCFQTꢀ
Bolivia
4KQꢀFGꢀ,CPGKTQ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢆꢑꢄꢋꢐꢀꢆꢈꢋꢑꢈꢈꢅꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢆꢑꢄꢋꢐꢀꢄꢍꢆꢑꢄꢋꢍꢆꢀ
#VGPFKFQꢀRQTꢀ7TWIWC[ꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
307
Chile
Colombia
#5%ꢁꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀꢏ/WNVKꢑ+PFWUVT[ꢐꢀ
.QUꢀ#NGTEGUꢀꢄꢊꢎꢊ
5CPVKCIQꢒꢀ%JKNGꢀ
+PUVTWOGPVCEKÉPꢀ.VFCꢁꢀ
%CNNGꢀꢋꢋꢆꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢋꢋꢑ#ꢑꢋꢅ
$QIQV±ꢒꢀ%QNQODKC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢎꢑꢄꢐꢀꢄꢊꢌꢑꢅꢌꢅꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢎꢑꢄꢐꢀꢄꢊꢍꢑꢌꢋꢌꢍꢀ
%1#5+0ꢀ%JKNGꢀ.VFCꢁꢀꢏ6GNGEQOꢐꢀ
*QNCPFCꢀꢋꢄꢍꢄ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢌꢑꢋꢐꢀꢎꢋꢄꢑꢋꢊꢋꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢌꢑꢋꢐꢀꢎꢋꢄꢑꢅꢇꢅꢆꢀ
5[EQOꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀꢏ&CVCEQOꢐꢀ
#XGPKFCꢀ'Nꢀ&QTCFQꢀꢍꢅꢋꢅ
$QIQV±ꢒꢀ%QNQODKC
5CPVKCIQꢒꢀ%JKNGꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢎꢄꢐꢀꢄꢄꢆꢑꢅꢎꢈꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢎꢄꢐꢀꢄꢌꢈꢑꢈꢆꢇꢇꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢌꢑꢋꢐꢀꢈꢋꢅꢑꢋꢊꢅꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢌꢑꢋꢐꢀꢈꢋꢅꢑꢋꢋꢍꢎꢀ
Costa Rica
4KORGZꢀ%JKNGꢀꢏ&CVCEQOꢐꢀ
#XFCꢁꢀ2GFTQꢀFGꢀ8CNFKXKCꢀꢋꢎꢈꢎ
5CPVKCIQꢒꢀ%JKNGꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢆꢎꢄꢑꢊꢈꢅꢑꢌꢌꢅꢋꢃꢌꢌꢅꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢆꢎꢄꢑꢄꢌꢈꢑꢈꢋꢅꢌꢀ
%1#5+0ꢀ%156#ꢀ4+%#ꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
&GNꢀ%GPVTQꢀ%WNVWTCNꢀGPꢀ5CPꢀ2GFTQ
ꢄꢅꢅꢀ/VUꢀ0QTVGꢒꢀꢄꢆꢀ/VUꢀ1GUVG
%CUCꢀꢖꢀꢊꢆꢆꢄ
5CPꢀ,QU¾ꢒꢀ%QUVCꢀ4KECꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢅꢎꢐꢀꢄꢇꢊꢑꢇꢊꢄꢆꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢅꢎꢐꢀꢄꢄꢆꢑꢎꢊꢈꢍꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
308
Dominican Republic
Guatemala
'UCEQORꢒꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
'26'.ꢀ
%CNNGꢀ5GOKPCTKQꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢆꢆ
'PUꢁꢀ2KCPVKPK
ꢋꢄꢀ#XGꢁꢀꢋꢌꢑꢊꢆꢀ<QPCꢀꢋꢅ
)WCVGOCNC
5CPVQꢀ&QOKPIQꢒꢀ4GRÐDNKECꢀ
&QOKPKECPC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢅꢄꢐꢀꢊꢎꢊꢑꢅꢈꢄꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢅꢄꢐꢀꢊꢎꢊꢑꢅꢈꢈꢊꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢅꢍꢐꢀꢆꢎꢊꢑꢎꢊꢆꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢅꢍꢐꢀꢆꢎꢆꢑꢅꢊꢊꢄꢀ
%QPVCEVQꢂꢀ(CDKQꢀ$TKVQꢀ
Honduras
#VGPFKFQꢀRQTꢀ5GVKUCꢒꢀ'Nꢀ5CNXCFQTꢀ
Ecuador
%QORNGOGPVQUꢀ'NGEVTÉPKEQUꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
#Xꢁꢀ)GPGTCNꢀ'PTKSWG\ꢀꢋꢇꢅꢅꢀ
5CPꢀ4CHCGNꢒꢀ'EWCFQT
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢍꢊꢑꢄꢐꢀꢊꢊꢈꢄꢆꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢍꢊꢑꢄꢐꢀꢊꢊꢋꢆꢍꢆꢀ
El Salvador
5'6+5#ꢀ
%QNꢁꢀ4QOCꢀ
2LGꢁꢀ%CTDQPGNNꢒꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢄꢇꢀ
5CPꢀ5CNXCFQTꢒꢀ'Nꢀ5CNXCFQT
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢅꢊꢐꢀꢄꢄꢊꢑꢅꢍꢍꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢅꢊꢐꢀꢄꢌꢍꢑꢄꢅꢌꢌꢀ
%QPVCEVQꢂꢀ#TPGꢀ)WGTTCꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
309
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀFGꢀ/¾ZKEQꢀ
5ꢁ#ꢁꢀFGꢀ%ꢁ8ꢁꢀ
4KQꢀ0KNQꢀꢈꢅꢈꢍꢑꢋꢄ
%Fꢁꢀ,WCTG\ꢒꢀ%JKJꢁꢀꢊꢄꢊꢋꢅ
/¾ZKEQ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢄꢑꢋꢎꢐꢀꢋꢋꢑꢅꢌꢌꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢄꢑꢋꢎꢐꢀꢋꢊꢑꢌꢎꢄꢄꢀ
Mexico
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀFGꢀ/¾ZKEQꢀ
5#ꢀFGꢀ%8ꢀ
&Tꢁꢀ#VNꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢋꢒꢀ&GURꢁꢀꢋꢅꢄꢀ
'FKHꢁꢀ6GRG[CEꢀ
<QPCꢀ4KQꢀ
ꢄꢄꢊꢄꢅꢀ6KLWCPCꢒꢀ$ꢁ%ꢁꢀ/¾ZKEQꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢎꢐꢀꢊꢈꢑꢊꢇꢑꢅꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢎꢐꢀꢊꢈꢑꢊꢇꢑꢅꢈꢀ
Nicaragua
#VGPFKFQꢀRQTꢀ'Nꢀ5CNXCFQTꢀ
Paraguay
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀFGꢀ/¾ZKEQꢒꢀ
5ꢁ#ꢁꢀFGꢀ%ꢁ8ꢁꢀ
2TQNQPICEKÉPꢀ4GHQTOCꢀꢌꢅꢅ
%QNꢁꢀ.QOCUꢀFGꢀ5CPVCꢀ(¾
ꢅꢋꢄꢋꢅꢀ/¾ZKEQꢒꢀ&ꢁ(ꢁ
#VGPFKFQꢀRQTꢀ7TWIWC[ꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢆꢄꢑꢆꢐꢀꢄꢆꢇꢑꢈꢊꢇꢍꢃꢄꢆꢇꢑꢈꢊꢍꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢄꢑꢆꢐꢄꢆꢇꢑꢈꢊꢅꢋꢀ
*2ꢀ&+4'%6ꢂꢀꢅꢋꢑꢇꢅꢅꢑꢆꢅꢎꢑꢈꢇꢅꢅꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
310
Peru
United States
%1#5+0ꢀ2GTWꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
ꢏ4GFGUꢀ2TKXCFCUꢐꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%QORCP[ꢀ
ꢆꢄꢅꢅꢀ$NWGꢀ.CIQQPꢀFTꢁꢀꢖꢍꢆꢅꢀ/KCOKꢒꢀ
(Nꢀꢊꢊꢋꢄꢎꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢊꢅꢆꢑꢄꢎꢆꢑꢆꢆꢎꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢊꢅꢆꢑꢄꢎꢌꢑꢈꢄꢇꢇꢀ
%CNNGꢀꢋꢀꢑꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢇꢍꢋꢀ%142#%ꢀ
.KOCꢀꢄꢌꢒꢀ2GTWꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢋꢋꢐꢀꢄꢄꢈꢑꢊꢊꢇꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢋꢋꢐꢀꢄꢄꢈꢑꢋꢆꢅꢍꢀ
%QPVCEVꢂꢀ,CXKGTꢀ4QFTKIWG\ꢀ
5#6'.ꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
ꢏ)QDKGTPQꢀ[ꢀTGFGUꢀRWDNKECUꢐꢀ
'PTKSWGꢀ2CNCEKQUꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢋꢆꢆꢀ
.KOCꢀꢋꢇꢀꢑꢀ2GTWꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢆꢋꢋꢐꢀꢈꢈꢎꢑꢄꢄꢆꢊꢃꢄꢈꢋꢑꢇꢅꢇꢆꢃ
ꢈꢈꢎꢑꢅꢄꢇꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢋꢋꢐꢀꢈꢈꢈꢑꢅꢊꢅꢆꢀ
%QPVCEVQꢂꢀ'NKCPCꢀ4G[ꢀFGꢀ%CUVTQꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂꢀ
DTKVVQPADGPVNG["JRꢁEQOꢀ
Uruguay
%QPCVGNꢀ5ꢁ#ꢁꢀ
'LKFQꢀꢋꢎꢍꢅ
/QPVGXKFGQꢒꢀ7TWIWC[
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢍꢇꢐꢀꢄꢑꢍꢄꢅꢊꢋꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢍꢇꢐꢀꢄꢑꢍꢄꢅꢎꢎꢅꢀ
%QPVCEVQꢂꢀ2CDNQꢀ$TCICꢀ
Venezuela
Trinidad and Tobago
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀFGꢀ8GPG\WGNCꢀ
ꢊTCꢁꢀ6TCPUXGTUCNꢀ.QUꢀ4WKEGUꢀ0TVG
'FHꢁꢀ5GITGꢒꢀ2KUQꢀꢋꢒꢄꢀ[ꢀꢊ
%CTCECUꢒꢀ8GPG\WNC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢆꢇꢑꢄꢐꢀꢄꢅꢌꢑꢇꢊꢆꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢆꢇꢑꢄꢐꢀꢄꢅꢌꢑꢇꢊꢎꢋ
$QTFGꢀ%QOOWPKECVKQPUꢀ
ꢋꢀ8CNUC[Pꢀ4QCF
%WTGRGꢒꢀ2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢇꢍꢌ
2QTVꢑQHꢑ5RCKPꢒꢀ6TKPKFCF
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢅꢍꢐꢀꢎꢎꢊꢑꢄꢅꢇꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢅꢍꢐꢀꢎꢈꢆꢑꢊꢊꢆꢄꢀ
%QPVCEVꢂꢀ&CXKFꢀ$GNITCXGꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
311
5[FPG[ꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ#WUVTCNKCꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢋꢌꢑꢄꢊꢀ6CNCXGTCꢀ4QCF
0QTVJꢀ4[FGꢒꢀ0ꢁ5ꢁ9ꢁꢀꢄꢋꢋꢊ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢋꢃꢄꢐꢀꢍꢍꢆꢅꢑꢌꢈꢈꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢋꢃꢄꢐꢀꢍꢇꢇꢇꢑꢍꢅꢌꢄꢀ
Asia and the Pacific
Australia
/GNDQWTPGꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ#WUVTCNKCꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢊꢋꢑꢈꢋꢀ,QUGRJꢀ5VTGGV
$NCEMDWTPꢒꢀ8+%ꢀꢊꢋꢊꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
Bangladesh
,KWꢀ+PVGTPCVKQPCNꢀ.VFꢀ
ꢋꢀꢇꢅꢅꢀꢎꢄꢍꢀꢈꢇꢆꢀꢏVQNNꢀHTGGꢐꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂꢀ
ꢏꢎꢋꢀꢊꢐꢀꢍꢄꢋꢅꢀꢆꢈꢅꢇꢀ
ꢎꢅꢀ'CUVꢀ6GLVWTKꢀ$C\CTꢒꢀꢄPFꢀ(NQQTꢀ
(CTOICVGꢀ&JCMCꢀ
$CPINCFGUJꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢋꢀꢊꢐꢀꢍꢄꢋꢅꢑꢆꢈꢇꢍꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢇꢇꢅꢑꢄꢑꢍꢋꢊꢑꢅꢈꢇꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢇꢇꢅꢑꢄꢑꢇꢌꢋꢑꢅꢊꢈꢀ
'ꢑ/CKNꢀ#FFTGUUꢂꢀLKW"DCPINCꢁPGVꢀ
$TWPGKꢀ&CTWUUCNCO
-QORQWVGTꢀ9KUOCPꢀ5FPꢀ$JFꢀ
$NQEMꢀ#ꢒꢀ7PKVꢀꢋꢒꢀ)TQWPFꢀ(NQQT
#DFWNꢀ4C\CMꢀ%QORNGZ
,CNCPꢀ)CFQPIꢀꢊꢋꢇꢅ
0GICTCꢀ$TWPGKꢀ&CTWUUCNGO
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢎꢌꢊꢑꢄꢑꢈꢄꢊꢍꢋꢇꢃꢈꢄꢆꢎꢅꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢎꢌꢊꢑꢄꢑꢈꢈꢋꢈꢍꢄꢀ
2GTVJꢀ
/GCUWTGOGPVꢀ+PPQXCVKQPꢀꢏ9#ꢐꢀ
2V[ꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
-KUJQTPꢀ%QWTV
5WKVGꢀꢊꢒꢀꢆꢇꢀ-KUJQTPꢀ4QCF
/QWPVꢀ2NGCUCPVꢒꢀ9#ꢀꢎꢋꢆꢊ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢋꢃꢍꢐꢀꢊꢋꢎꢑꢄꢌꢆꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢋꢃꢍꢐꢀꢊꢋꢎꢑꢋꢊꢍꢄꢀ
/QDKNGꢂꢀꢎꢋꢑꢋꢇꢑꢊꢊꢑꢎꢈꢊꢈꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢅꢇꢅꢍꢑꢄꢈꢈꢌꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
312
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢅꢐꢀꢇꢎꢎꢍꢑꢆꢅꢌꢈꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢈꢈꢆꢆꢎꢀ)2*)<ꢀ%0ꢀ
China
$GKLKPIꢀ
%JKPCꢀ*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%Qꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢆꢑꢎꢃ(ꢀ9GUVꢀ9KPIꢀ1HHKEG
%JKPCꢀ9QTNFꢀ6TCFGꢀ%GPVGT
0Qꢁꢀꢋꢀ,KCPꢀ)WQꢀ/GPꢀ9GKꢀ#XGPWG
$GKLKPIꢀꢋꢅꢅꢅꢅꢈꢀ24%
5JCPIJCKꢀ
%JKPCꢀ*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%Qꢁꢒꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢋꢅꢑꢋꢄꢃ(ꢀ0QXGNꢀ$WKNFKPI
0Qꢁꢀꢇꢇꢌꢀ*WCKꢀ*CKꢀ<JQPIꢀ.W
5JCPIJCKꢒꢀꢄꢅꢅꢅꢄꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢋꢐꢀꢎꢈꢌꢈꢑꢊꢇꢇꢇꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢇꢎꢑꢋꢅꢐꢀꢎꢆꢅꢆꢑꢊꢇꢇꢇꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢑꢋꢅꢐꢀꢎꢆꢅꢆꢑꢋꢅꢊꢊꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢅꢇꢆꢑꢄꢄꢎꢅꢋꢀ%65*2ꢀ%0ꢀ
%CDNGꢂꢀꢋꢍꢄꢅꢀ$GKLKPIꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢋꢐꢀꢎꢄꢎꢌꢑꢇꢆꢄꢊꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢅꢇꢎꢑꢊꢊꢆꢌꢌꢀ%*25$ꢀ%0ꢀ
5JGP[CPIꢀ
%JGPIFWꢀ
%JKPCꢀ*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%Qꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢄꢄꢃ(ꢀ&C[Gꢀ4QCF
%JKPCꢀ*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%Qꢁꢒꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢋꢄꢃ(ꢀ5JGP[CPIꢀ5CPMGKꢀ6QTEJ
$WKNFKPIꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢄꢎꢄꢀ5JKHWꢀ4QCFꢒꢀ
5JGPJGꢀ&KUVTKEV
0Qꢁꢀꢊꢍꢀ&C[Gꢀ4QCF
%JGPIFWꢀꢎꢋꢅꢅꢋꢎꢀ24%
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢇꢐꢀꢎꢎꢎꢑꢊꢇꢇꢇꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢇꢐꢀꢎꢎꢎꢑꢆꢊꢌꢌꢀ
5JGP[CPIꢀꢋꢋꢅꢅꢋꢊꢀ24%ꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢈꢐꢀꢄꢌꢍꢅꢋꢌꢅꢒꢀꢄꢌꢍꢅꢋꢌꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢈꢐꢀꢄꢌꢍꢅꢄꢊꢄꢀ
)WCPI\JQWꢀ
%JKPCꢀ*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%Qꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢌꢃ(ꢀ6ꢁ2ꢁ2NC\C
ꢍꢃꢋꢅꢍꢒꢀ.KWꢀ*WCꢀ4QCF
)WCPI\JQWꢀꢆꢋꢅꢅꢋꢅꢀ24%
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
:K CPꢀ$TCPEJꢀ1HHKEGꢀ
ꢊꢃ(ꢀ'CUVꢀ0GYꢀ6GEJPQNQI[
6TCFGꢀ%GPVGTꢀ#ꢋꢎ
;CPVCꢀ.Wꢀ<JQPIꢀ&WCP
:K CPꢀꢌꢋꢅꢅꢆꢈꢀ24%ꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢍꢐꢀꢆꢆꢄꢀꢍꢊꢌꢍꢀ
ꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢅꢐꢀꢇꢎꢎꢍꢑꢊꢇꢇꢇꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
313
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢎꢃꢄꢍꢐꢀꢆꢆꢄꢀꢍꢄꢈꢊꢀ
*QPIꢀ-QPI
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀꢏ*-ꢐꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢋꢌꢑꢄꢋꢃ(ꢀ5JGNNꢀ6QYGTꢒꢀ
6KOGUꢀ5SWCTG
ꢋꢀ/CVJGUQPꢀ5VTGGV
%CWUGYC[ꢀ$C[
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ%Qꢁꢒꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢋꢌꢑꢄꢋꢃ(ꢀ5JGNNꢀ6QYGTꢒꢀ
6KOGUꢀ5SWCTG
ꢋꢀ/CVJGUQPꢀ5VTGGV
%CWUGYC[ꢀ$C[
*QPIꢀ-QPI
*QPIꢀ-QPI
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢆꢄꢐꢀꢄꢆꢍꢍꢑꢌꢌꢌꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢆꢄꢐꢀꢄꢆꢅꢎꢑꢍꢄꢆꢎꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢆꢄꢐꢀꢄꢆꢍꢍꢑꢌꢇꢇꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢆꢄꢐꢀꢄꢆꢅꢎꢑꢍꢄꢊꢊꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
314
6GNGZꢂꢀꢈꢄꢆꢑꢄꢈꢄꢄꢀ*2+.ꢀ+0ꢀ
India
$CPICNQTGꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+PFKCꢀ2XVꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
'ODCUU[ꢀ2QKPVꢀ
ꢋꢆꢅꢀ+PHCPVT[ꢀ4QCFꢀ
$CPICNQTGꢀꢆꢎꢅꢅꢅꢋ
/WODCKꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+PFKCꢀ2XVꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
7PKVꢑꢊꢒꢀ$ꢑ9KPI
)TQWPFꢀ(NQQTꢒꢀ0GGNCOꢀ%GPVGT
*KPFꢀ%[ENGꢀ4QCF
9QTNKꢒꢀ/WODCKꢀꢈꢅꢅꢀꢅꢄꢆ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢍꢋꢃꢄꢄꢐꢀꢈꢍꢊꢑꢈꢌꢄꢄꢀQTꢀꢈꢍꢊꢑꢈꢌꢄꢊꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂꢀ
ꢍꢋꢑꢄꢄꢑꢈꢍꢊꢑꢍꢍꢌꢇꢑꢌꢍꢀQTꢀꢍꢋꢑꢄꢄꢑꢈꢍꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢃꢄꢄꢐꢀꢈꢍꢊꢑꢌꢇꢄꢊꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢋꢋꢑꢌꢎꢇꢋꢄꢀ*2+$ꢀ+0ꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢍꢋꢃꢇꢅꢐꢀꢄꢄꢆꢑꢊꢅꢄꢈꢀQTꢀꢄꢅꢍꢑꢋꢇꢅꢇꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢃꢇꢅꢐꢀꢄꢄꢆꢑꢎꢋꢇꢎꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢇꢈꢆꢑꢄꢌꢌꢊꢀ*2ꢀ+0ꢀ
%CNEWVVCꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+PFKCꢀ2XVꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢌꢅꢇꢀ%GPVTCNꢀ2NC\Cꢀ
ꢄꢃꢎꢀ5CTCVꢀ$QUGꢀ4QCF
%CNEWVVCꢀꢌꢅꢅꢀꢅꢄꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢃꢊꢊꢐꢀꢌꢈꢆꢀꢈꢌꢆꢆꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂꢀ
ꢍꢋꢑꢊꢊꢑꢈꢌꢆꢑꢈꢌꢆꢆꢀ
0GYꢀ&GNJKꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+PFKCꢀ.VFꢁ
%JCPFKYCNNCꢀ'UVCVG
/Cꢀ#PCPFOCKꢀ#UJTCOꢀ/CTIꢒꢀ
-CNMCLK
0GYꢀ&GNJKꢀꢋꢋꢅꢀꢅꢋꢍ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢑꢋꢋꢐꢀꢎꢇꢄꢑꢎꢅꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢑꢋꢋꢐꢀꢎꢇꢄꢑꢎꢅꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢃꢊꢊꢐꢀꢌꢈꢇꢀꢆꢌꢋꢀ
*[FGTCDCFꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ+PFKCꢀ2XVꢁꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢆꢑꢍꢑꢋꢊꢀ6CTCOCPFCNꢀ%QORNGZ
ꢍVJꢀ(NQQTꢒꢀ5CKHCDCF
*[FGTCDCFꢀꢆꢅꢅꢀꢅꢅꢈ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢃꢈꢅꢐꢀꢄꢊꢄꢑꢎꢌꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢋꢃꢈꢅꢐꢀꢄꢄꢅꢁꢅꢋꢄꢀQTꢀꢄꢊꢋꢁꢌꢆꢎꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
315
Indonesia
Korea, Republic of
$CPFWPIꢀ
5GQWNꢀ
2ꢁ6ꢁꢀ$GTECꢀ*CTFC[CRGTMCUC
,CNCPꢀ6GPIMWꢀ#PIMCUCꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢊꢊ
$CPFWPIꢀꢈꢅꢋꢊꢄ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ-QTGCꢀ.VFꢁ
*2ꢀ-QTGCꢀ*QWUG
ꢄꢆꢑꢋꢄꢀ;QKFQꢑFQPIꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢄꢑꢄꢄꢐꢀꢄꢆꢅꢑꢇꢋꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢄꢑꢄꢄꢐꢀꢄꢆꢅꢑꢎꢌꢆꢌꢀ
;QWPIFGWPIꢀRQꢑMWꢀ
5GQWNꢀꢋꢆꢅꢑꢅꢋꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢄꢃꢄꢐꢑꢌꢎꢍꢑꢅꢋꢋꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢄꢃꢄꢐꢀꢌꢇꢈꢑꢌꢅꢇꢈꢀ
6CGIWꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ-QTGCꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢋꢇꢃ(ꢒꢀ;QWPIꢀ0COꢀ6QYGTꢀ$ꢃ&ꢀꢋꢋꢋ
5JKPꢀ%JGQPꢑFQPIꢒꢀ&QPIꢑ)Wꢀ
6CGIW
,CMCTVCꢀ
2ꢁ6ꢁꢀ$GTECꢀ*CTFC[CRGTMCUC
,CNCPꢀ#DFWNꢀ/WKUꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢎꢄꢀ
,CMCTVCꢀꢋꢅꢋꢎꢅꢑ+PFQPGUKCꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢄꢃꢄꢋꢐꢀꢊꢇꢅꢀꢅꢍꢅꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢄꢃꢄꢋꢐꢀꢊꢇꢋꢀꢄꢅꢈꢈꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢄꢃꢆꢊꢐꢀꢌꢆꢈꢑꢄꢎꢎꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢄꢃꢆꢊꢐꢀꢌꢆꢄꢑꢈꢎꢍꢎꢀ
6CGLGQPꢀ
5COUWPIꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ-QTGCꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢇꢃ(ꢀ*[WPFCKꢀ$NFIꢒ
ꢋꢄꢍꢇꢀ&QQPUCPꢑFQPIꢒꢀ5GQꢑIW
6CGLGQP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢇꢄꢑꢈꢄꢑꢈꢇꢅꢑꢄꢇꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢇꢄꢑꢈꢄꢑꢈꢇꢅꢑꢄꢇꢄꢇꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
316
Malaysia
Pakistan
-WCNCꢀ.WORWTꢀ
+UNCOCDCFꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5CNGUꢀꢏ/CNC[UKCꢐꢀ
5FPꢀ$JFꢀ
)TQWPFꢀ(NQQTꢒꢀ9KUOCꢀ%[ENGECTTK
ꢄꢇꢇꢀ,CNCPꢀ4CLCꢀ.CWV
/WUJMQꢀ'NGEVTQPKEUꢀꢏ2XVꢐꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢎꢇꢑ9ꢀ5COCꢀ2NC\Cꢒꢀ$NWGꢀ#TGCꢒꢀ)ꢑꢌ
+UNCOCDCFꢀꢈꢈꢅꢅꢅ
2CMKUVCPꢀ
ꢆꢅꢊꢆꢅꢀ-WCNCꢀ.WORWT
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢋꢑꢇꢅꢅꢑꢇꢇꢑꢇꢇꢈꢇꢀ6QNNꢀ(TGGꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢅꢃꢊꢐꢀꢄꢍꢇꢑꢍꢋꢆꢌꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢍꢄꢑꢆꢋꢑꢇꢄꢇꢑꢈꢆꢍꢃꢇꢋꢅꢑꢍꢆꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢍꢄꢑꢆꢋꢑꢇꢋꢎꢑꢋꢍꢅꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢆꢈꢅꢅꢋꢀ/WUMKꢀ2Mꢀ
2GPCPIꢀ
-CTCEJKꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5CNGUꢀꢏ/CNC[UKCꢐꢀ
5FPꢀ$JF
/WUJMQꢀ'NGEVTQPKEUꢀꢏ2XVꢐꢀ.VFꢁ
1QUOCPꢀ%JCODGTU
$C[CPꢀ.GRCUꢀ(TGGꢀ6TCFGꢀ<QPGꢀ
ꢋꢋꢍꢅꢅꢀ$C[CPꢀ.GRCU
2GPCPI
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢅꢃꢈꢐꢀꢎꢈꢄꢑꢊꢆꢅꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢅꢃꢈꢐꢀꢎꢈꢄꢑꢊꢆꢋꢋꢀ
#DFWNNCJꢀ*CTQQPꢀ4QCF
-CTCEJKꢀꢌꢈꢈꢅꢅꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢍꢄꢑꢄꢋꢑꢆꢎꢎꢑꢅꢈꢍꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢍꢄꢑꢄꢋꢑꢆꢎꢎꢑꢅꢇꢅꢋꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢄꢍꢅꢍꢈꢀ/75-1ꢀ2-ꢀ
New Zealand
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ0GYꢀ<GCNCPFꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢋꢇꢎꢑꢋꢍꢅꢀ9KNNKUꢀ5VTGGV
9GNNKPIVQP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢅꢇꢅꢅꢑꢌꢊꢇꢑꢊꢌꢇꢀ
ꢏKPVGTPCVKQPCNꢀꢎꢈꢑꢈꢑꢇꢅꢄꢑꢎꢇꢅꢅꢐꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢈꢑꢈꢐꢀꢇꢅꢄꢑꢎꢇꢇꢋꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
317
Philippines
Sri Lanka
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ2JKNKRRKPGUꢀ
%QTRQTCVKQPꢀ
2TGEKUKQPꢀ6GEJPKECNꢀ5GTXKEGUꢀ
ꢏ286ꢐꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢍVJꢀ(NQQTꢒꢀ4WHKPQꢀ2CEKHKEꢀ6QYGT
ꢎꢌꢇꢈꢀ#[CNCꢀ#XGPWG
0Qꢁꢀꢄꢒꢀ4ꢁ#ꢁꢀ&Gꢀ/GNꢀ/CYCVJC
%QNQODQꢀꢅꢅꢆꢅꢅ
/CMCVKꢀ%KV[ꢀꢋꢄꢄꢍꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢈꢋꢐꢀꢆꢍꢌꢑꢇꢎꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢈꢋꢐꢀꢆꢍꢌꢑꢇꢎꢊꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢊꢑꢄꢐꢀꢇꢍꢈꢑꢋꢈꢆꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢊꢑꢄꢐꢀꢇꢋꢋꢑꢋꢅꢇꢅꢒꢀꢇꢋꢋꢑꢅꢎꢊꢆꢀ
1PNKPGꢀ5CNGUꢂꢀꢏꢎꢊꢑꢄꢐꢀꢇꢍꢊꢑꢍꢍꢆꢍꢀ
Singapore
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5KPICRQTGꢀ
ꢏ5CNGUꢐꢀ2VGꢀ.VFꢀ
ꢈꢆꢅꢀ#NGZCPFTCꢀ4QCF
5KPICRQTGꢀꢋꢋꢍꢍꢎꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢎꢆꢀꢄꢌꢆꢀꢊꢇꢇꢇꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂꢀ
*2ꢀ&KTGEVꢂꢀꢋꢀꢇꢅꢅꢀꢄꢍꢄꢑꢇꢋꢅꢅ
#RRNKECVKQPꢀ5WRRQTVꢂꢀꢎꢆꢑꢊꢌꢈꢑꢈꢄꢈꢄ
*CTFYCTGꢀ5GTXKEGꢀ*QVNKPGꢂꢀ
ꢎꢆꢑꢊꢌꢆꢑꢇꢊꢆꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢎꢆꢀꢄꢌꢈꢀꢌꢇꢇꢌꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
318
6CKYCP
Taiwan
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ6CKYCPꢀ.VFꢁ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ$WKNFKPIꢀ
ꢇꢃ(ꢀ0Qꢁꢀꢊꢊꢌꢒꢀ(Wꢑ*UKPIꢀ0QTVJꢀ4QCF
6CKRGKꢀꢋꢅꢈꢇꢊꢀ6CKYCP
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢑꢄꢐꢀꢌꢋꢄꢑꢅꢈꢅꢈꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢑꢄꢐꢀꢌꢋꢇꢑꢄꢍꢄꢇꢀ
*2ꢀ&+4'%6ꢀ$CUKEꢀ6QQNUꢀHTGGꢀVGNꢂꢀ
ꢅꢇꢅꢑꢄꢋꢄꢑꢆꢊꢆꢀ
%JWPINKꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ6CKYCPꢀ.VFꢁ
0Qꢁꢀꢄꢅꢀ-CQꢑ5JWCPIꢀ4QCF
2KPIꢑ%JGPꢒꢀꢊꢄꢈꢅꢈ
6CQ[WCPꢀ*UKGJ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢃꢊꢐꢀꢈꢍꢄꢑꢍꢎꢎꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢃꢊꢐꢀꢈꢍꢄꢑꢍꢎꢎꢍꢀ
Thailand
-CQJUKWPIꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ6CKYCPꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢋꢄVJꢀ(NQQTꢒꢀꢋꢅꢀ5[Jꢑ9GKꢀꢈVJꢀ4QCF
-CQJUKWPI
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢃꢌꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢑꢋꢋꢍꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢃꢌꢐꢀꢊꢊꢅꢑꢇꢆꢎꢇꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀꢏ6JCKNCPFꢐꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢄꢊTFꢑꢄꢆVJꢀHNQQTꢀ8KDWNVJCPKꢀ6QYGTꢀꢄꢀ
ꢊꢋꢍꢍꢀ4COCꢀ+8ꢀ4QCFꢀ
-NQPIꢀ6QG[ꢒꢀ$CPIMQMꢀꢋꢅꢋꢋꢅ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢎꢎꢑꢄꢐꢀꢎꢎꢋꢑꢊꢍꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢎꢎꢑꢄꢐꢀꢎꢎꢋꢑꢊꢍꢈꢎꢀ
6CKEJWPIꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ6CKYCPꢀ.VFꢁ
ꢋꢅ(ꢒꢀꢆꢈꢅꢒꢀ5GEꢁꢀꢋ
Viet Nam
9GPꢑ*UKPꢀ4QCF
6CKEJWPI
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢃꢈꢐꢀꢊꢄꢌꢑꢅꢋꢆꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢇꢇꢎꢃꢈꢐꢀꢊꢄꢎꢑꢆꢄꢌꢈꢀ
5[UVGOꢀ+PVGTNCEGꢀ
ꢊꢍꢀ/CKꢀ*CEꢀ&Gꢀ5VTGGVꢀ
*CKꢀ$Cꢀ6TWPIꢀ&KUVTKEVꢀ
*CPQK
8KGVPCOꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢇꢈꢈꢑꢄꢄꢍꢑꢇꢅꢇꢃꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢇꢈꢈꢑꢄꢄꢍꢑꢆꢆꢊꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
319
Fukuoka
Japan
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
&CKUCPꢀ*CMCVCꢑ-CKUGKꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢋꢑꢊꢑꢎꢀ*CMCVCGMKOKPCOKꢀ
*CMCVCꢑMWꢒꢀ(WMWQMCꢑUJK
(WMWQMCꢀꢇꢋꢄ
Aichi
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
0CIQ[Cꢀ-QMWUCKꢀ%GPVGTꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢋꢑꢈꢌꢑꢋꢀ0CMQPQꢀ0CMCOWTCꢑMWꢒꢀ
0CIQ[CꢑUJK
Hiroshima
#KEJKꢀꢈꢆꢅ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
0KUUGKꢑ*GKYCMQGPꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢊꢑꢄꢆꢀ0CMCLKOCꢑEJQꢀ0CMCꢑMWꢒꢀ
*KTQUJKOCꢑUJK
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
0CMCPGꢑ0KUUGKꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢈꢑꢄꢆꢑꢋꢇꢀ0KUJKꢑOCEJKꢒꢀ6Q[QVCꢑUJK
#KEJKꢀꢈꢌꢋ
*KTQUJKOCꢀꢌꢊꢅ
Akita
Hokkaido
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
0KJQPUGKOGKꢀ#MKVCꢀ%JWQFQTKꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢈꢑꢄꢑꢌꢀ0CMCFQTKꢒꢀ#MKVCꢑUJK
#MKVCꢀꢅꢋꢅ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
5WOKVQOQꢑUGKOGK
5CRRQTQꢀ%JWQꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢋꢑꢋꢑꢋꢈꢀ/KPCOKPKLQꢑJKICUJKꢀ
%JWQꢑMWꢒꢀ5CRRQTQꢑUJK
*QMMCKFQꢀꢅꢎꢅ
Chiba
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
9$)ꢀ/CNKDWꢀ'CUVꢀ$NFIꢁꢀꢋꢍ(
ꢄꢑꢎꢀ0CMCUGꢀ/KJCOCꢑMWꢒꢀ%JKDCꢑUJK
%JKDCꢀꢄꢎꢋꢑꢌꢋ
Hyogo
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢋꢑꢊꢑꢄꢀ/WTQ[Cꢀ0KUJKꢑMWꢒꢀ-QDGꢑUJK
*[QIQꢀꢎꢆꢋꢑꢄꢄ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
320
Ibaraki
Kyoto
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
/KVQꢀ;QOKWTKꢑ-CKMCPꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢄꢑꢈꢑꢄꢀ/KPCOKꢑOCEJKꢒꢀ/KVQꢑUJK
+DCTCMKꢀꢊꢋꢅ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
6UWMWDCꢑ/KVUWKꢀ$NFIꢁ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
/CGFCꢀ50ꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢆꢋꢇꢀ#MKPQPQꢑEJQꢀ0KL[Qꢑ-WFCTW
-CTCUWOCꢒꢀ0CMCI[QꢑMW
-[QVQꢀꢎꢅꢈ
Miyagi
ꢋꢑꢎꢑꢋꢀ6CMG\QPQꢒꢀ6UWMWDCꢑUJK
+DCTCMKꢀꢊꢅꢆ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
;COCIWEJKꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢋꢑꢋꢑꢊꢋꢀ+EJKDCPEJQꢀ#QDCꢑMWꢒꢀ
5GPFCKꢑUJK
Ishikawa
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
-CPC\CYCꢀ/-ꢀ$NFIꢁ
/K[CIKꢀꢍꢇꢅ
ꢍꢇꢑꢇꢀ5CKPGPꢑOCEJKꢒꢀ-CPC\CYCꢑUJK
+UJKMCYCꢀꢍꢄꢅ
Nagano
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
(QTWOꢀ*QPLQꢀ$NFIꢁ
Kanagawa
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢊꢑꢄꢑꢄꢀ5CMCFQ
ꢄꢑꢈꢑꢋꢀ*QPLQꢒꢀ/CVUWOQVQꢑUJK
0CICPQꢀꢊꢍꢅ
6CMCVUWꢑMWꢒꢀ-CYCUCMKꢑUJK
-CPCICYCꢀꢄꢋꢊ
Osaka
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢍꢑꢊꢄꢀ6COWTCEJQꢒꢀ#VUWIKꢑUJK
-CPCICYCꢀꢄꢈꢊ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
%JWQꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢆꢑꢈꢑꢄꢅꢀ0KUJKPCMCLKOC
;QFQICYCꢑMWꢒꢀ1UCMCꢑUJK
1UCMCꢀꢆꢊꢄ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
321
Saitama
Tochigi
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
/KVUWKꢑUGKOGKꢀ1OK[C
/K[COCEJKꢀ$NFIꢁꢀꢄꢑꢍꢎꢑꢋ
/K[COCEJKꢒꢀ1OK[CꢑUJK
5CKVCOCꢀꢊꢊꢅꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
0KUUGKꢑ-WOCIC[Cꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢄꢑꢈꢄꢀ/K[CꢑOCEJKꢒꢀ-WOCIC[CꢑUJK
5CKVCOCꢀꢊꢎꢅ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
%JK[QFCUGKOGKꢑ7VUWPQOK[Cꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢄꢑꢊꢑꢋꢀ1FQTKꢒꢀ7VUWPQOK[CꢑUJK
6QEJKIKꢀꢊꢄꢅ
Tokyo
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢍꢑꢋꢀ6CMCMWTCꢑEJQꢒꢀ*CEJKQLKꢑUJK
6QM[Qꢀꢋꢍꢄꢑꢇꢆꢋꢅ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
0#(ꢀ$NFIꢁ
Shizuoka
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ,CRCPꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
-CYCUGKꢑ4KPM[Qꢀ$NFIꢁ
ꢊꢑꢇꢑꢄꢅꢀ6CMCKFQꢑJKICUJKꢒꢀ
5WIKPCOKꢑMW
ꢎꢑꢎꢀ*QUQLKOCꢑEJQꢀ*COCOCVUWꢑUJK
5JK\WQMCꢀꢈꢊꢆ
6QM[Qꢀꢋꢎꢇ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
322
Egypt
Middle East and Africa
14#5%1/ꢀ
Algeria
1PUKꢀ5CYKTKUꢀꢓꢀ%Q
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢋꢋꢍꢋ
ꢋꢎꢅꢒꢀꢄꢎVJꢀ,WN[ꢀ5VTGGV
#IW\Cꢃ%CKTQ
46+ꢀ#NIGTKCꢀ
ꢄꢎꢒꢀ$KUꢀTWGꢀ/QJCOOGFꢀ
*CFLꢑ#JOGF
ꢏGZꢁꢀ4WGꢀ,GCPꢀ2KGTTGꢀ&KPGVꢐ
ꢋꢎꢅꢊꢆꢀ*[FTCꢀ
#NIGT
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢄꢅꢄꢐꢀꢊꢅꢋꢆꢄꢇꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢄꢅꢄꢐꢀꢊꢈꢈꢄꢎꢋꢆꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢍꢄꢌꢎꢇꢀQTUEOꢀWPꢀ
#NIGTKG
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢄꢋꢊꢑꢄꢑꢎꢅꢎꢈꢆꢅꢀ
Iran (Islamic Repub-
lic of)
Angola
'XGTVGEJꢀ
ꢋꢋꢀDKUꢒꢀTWGꢀ6QGRHHGT
ꢋꢄꢅꢎꢀ)GPGXG
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
Bahrain
$#/6'%ꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢋꢅꢊꢌꢊ
%CRKVCNꢀEGPVTGꢀ
5JQRꢀꢋꢋꢎ
ꢉꢈꢋꢑꢄꢄꢑꢊꢈꢎꢀꢍꢄꢀꢍꢄꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢈꢋꢑꢄꢄꢑꢊꢈꢎꢀꢇꢎꢀꢍꢋꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢈꢄꢋꢀꢌꢇꢌꢀ
4QCFꢀꢋꢈꢅꢆ
#TGCꢀꢊꢋꢈ
/CPCOC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢍꢑꢌꢊꢑꢄꢌꢆꢎꢌꢇꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢍꢑꢌꢊꢑꢄꢌꢎꢎꢎꢍꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢇꢆꢆꢅꢀ9#'.ꢀ$0ꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
323
Israel
Lebanon
%QORWVCVKQPꢀCPFꢀ/GCUWTGOGPVꢀ
5[UVGOUꢀꢏ%/5ꢐꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢋꢋꢒꢀ*CUJNQUJCꢀ5VTGGV
6GNꢑ#XKXꢀꢎꢌꢅꢎꢅ
%QORWVGTꢀ+PHQTOCVKQPꢀ5[UVGOUꢀ
%ꢁ+ꢁ5ꢁꢀ
.GDCPQPꢀ5VTGGV
%JCOOCUꢀ$NFIꢁ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢋꢋꢑꢎꢄꢌꢈ
&QTCꢑ$GKTWV
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢍꢌꢄꢀꢏꢅꢊꢐꢀꢆꢊꢇꢑꢅꢊꢑꢇꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢍꢌꢄꢀꢏꢅꢊꢐꢀꢆꢊꢌꢑꢆꢅꢑꢆꢆꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢊꢌꢋꢄꢊꢈꢀ*2%/5ꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢋꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢅꢆꢑꢈꢋꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢋꢃꢋꢐꢀꢎꢅꢋꢁꢍꢅꢎ
6GNꢃHCZꢂꢀꢏꢊꢆꢌꢍꢐꢀꢆꢋꢈꢑꢄꢆꢎꢀ
ꢏ%[RTWUꢀ$CUGFꢀ.KPGꢐꢀ
Jordan
6GNGZꢂꢀꢈꢄꢊꢅꢍꢀEJCEKUꢀNGꢀ
5EKGPVKHKEꢀꢓꢀ/GFKECNꢀ5WRRNKGUꢀ%Qꢁꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢋꢊꢇꢌ
#OOCP
Malawi
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢄꢃꢎꢐꢀꢎꢄꢑꢈꢍꢑꢅꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢄꢃꢎꢐꢀꢎꢄꢑꢇꢄꢑꢆꢇꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢄꢋꢈꢆꢎꢀUCDEQꢀLQꢀ
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
Mauritius
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
Kuwait
#Nꢑ-JCNFK[Cꢀ'NGEVTQPKEUꢀꢓꢀ
'NGEVTKECNUꢀ'SWKROGPVꢀ%Qꢁꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢇꢊꢅ
5CHCVꢀꢋꢊꢅꢅꢍ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢆꢐꢀꢈꢇꢀꢋꢊꢀꢅꢈꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢆꢐꢀꢈꢇꢀꢋꢄꢀꢍꢇꢊꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
324
Morocco
Nigeria
5+%16'.ꢀ
/CPCIGOGPVꢀ+PHQTOCVKQPꢀ5[UVGOUꢀ
%Qꢁꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
ꢊꢀ)GTTCTFꢀ4QCF
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢆꢊꢊꢇꢎ
+MQ[Kꢒꢀ.CIQU
%QORNGZGꢀFGUꢀ*CDQWU
6QWTꢀ%ꢒꢀCXGPWGꢀFGUꢀ(CT
%CUCDNCPECꢀꢅꢋ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢉꢄꢋꢄꢀꢏꢅꢄꢐꢀꢊꢋꢑꢄꢄꢑꢌꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢉꢄꢋꢄꢀꢏꢅꢄꢐꢀꢊꢋꢑꢎꢆꢑꢈꢆꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢄꢌꢎꢅꢈꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢄꢊꢈꢑꢋꢑꢄꢎꢍꢋꢊꢅꢌꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢄꢊꢈꢑꢋꢑꢄꢎꢍꢄꢌꢆꢆꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢄꢊꢆꢇꢄꢀ'%ꢀ0)ꢀ
Mozambique
Oman
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ
*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
+/6#%ꢀ..%ꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢆꢋꢋꢍꢎ
#Nꢀ*C[GMꢀ5VTGGV
/KPCꢀCNꢀ(CJCN
/WUECV
Namibia
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ
*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀ
ꢏꢍꢎꢇꢐꢀꢌꢅꢌꢑꢌꢄꢌꢒꢀꢏꢍꢎꢇꢐꢀꢌꢅꢌꢑꢌꢄꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢇꢐꢀꢌꢍꢎꢑꢎꢊꢍꢒꢀ
ꢏꢍꢎꢇꢐꢀꢌꢍꢌꢑꢌꢅꢍꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
325
Qatar
South Africa
3CVCTꢀ&CVCOCVKQPUꢀ5[UVGOUꢀ
#Nꢀ#JGFꢀ$WKNFKPIꢒꢀꢆVJꢀHNQQT
#Nꢀ/WVJQHꢀ5VTGGV
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKECꢀ
ꢏ2V[ꢁꢐꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢋꢄꢅꢒꢀ*QYCTFꢀ2NCEG
ꢌꢈꢆꢅꢀ%CRGꢀ6QYP
&QJC
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢍꢌꢈꢃꢈꢊꢁꢍꢍꢁꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢍꢌꢈꢃꢈꢊꢁꢄꢋꢁꢆꢈꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢈꢇꢊꢊꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢄꢌꢀꢄꢋꢀꢎꢆꢇꢑꢎꢋꢅꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢄꢌꢀꢄꢋꢀꢎꢇꢆꢑꢊꢌꢇꢆꢀ
*GYNGVVꢑ2CEMCTFꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKECꢀ
ꢏ2V[ꢁꢐꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
Saudi Arabia
2TKXCVGꢀ$CI
9GPF[YQQFꢀꢄꢋꢈꢇ
/QFGTPꢀ'NGEVTQPKEUꢀ'UVCDNKUJOGPVꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢄꢄꢅꢋꢆ
2TKPEGꢀ/WUCFꢀ+DPꢀ#DFWNC\K\ꢀ5Vꢁ
4K[CFJꢀꢋꢋꢈꢍꢆ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢄꢌꢑꢋꢋꢑꢇꢅꢎꢀꢋꢋꢌꢊꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢄꢌꢑꢋꢋꢑꢇꢅꢎꢀꢋꢄꢋꢊꢀ
Tunisia
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢌꢎꢑꢊꢅꢊꢅꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢌꢎꢑꢄꢆꢌꢅꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀ(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢌꢎꢑꢌꢎꢈꢍꢀ
ECDNGꢀ417(-1ꢀ
2TGEKUKQPꢀ'NGEVTQPKSWGꢀ
ꢆꢒꢀTWGꢀFGꢀ%J[RTGꢑ/WVWGNNGꢀ8KNNG
ꢋꢅꢅꢄꢀ6WPKUꢀ$GNXGFGTG
/QFGTPꢀ'NGEVTQPKEUꢀ'UVCDNKUJOGPVꢀ
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢄꢄꢅꢋꢆ
CNꢀ0KOGTꢀ$WKNFKPI
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢄꢋꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢌꢇꢆꢑꢅꢊꢌꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀRJQPGꢀPWODGTꢏUꢐꢂꢀ
ꢏꢄꢋꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢇꢍꢅꢑꢎꢌꢄꢀ
4K[CFJꢀꢋꢋꢈꢍꢆ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢄꢋꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢌꢇꢅꢑꢄꢈꢋꢀ
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢈꢎꢄꢈꢄꢎꢎꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢅꢋꢐꢀꢈꢎꢄꢈꢈꢅꢈꢀ
6GNGZꢂꢀꢏꢅꢈꢅꢍꢐꢀꢋꢇꢄꢊꢇꢀ6'.'%ꢀ60ꢀ
#FFKVKQPCNꢀ(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢎꢎꢃꢋꢐꢀꢈꢌꢎꢑꢌꢎꢈꢍꢀ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Chapter 6
Service and Support
326
#DWꢀ&JCDK
United Arab Emirates
'OKVCEꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
$NQEMꢀ4$5ꢀ#TGPEQꢀ$NFIꢁ
<CDGNꢀ4QCF
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢇꢊꢍꢋ
&WDCK
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢌꢋꢃꢄꢐꢀꢌꢌꢑꢅꢈꢑꢋꢍꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢌꢋꢃꢄꢐꢀꢌꢄꢑꢊꢅꢑꢆꢇꢀ
Zambia
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
Zimbabwe
2JQPGꢀ0WODGTꢂꢀꢏꢍꢌꢋꢃꢈꢐꢀꢊꢌꢑꢌꢆꢑꢍꢋꢀ
(CZꢂꢀꢏꢍꢌꢋꢃꢈꢐꢀꢊꢌꢑꢅꢇꢑꢍꢍꢀ
'OKVCEꢀ.VFꢁꢀ
*CPFNGFꢀD[ꢀ*2ꢀ5QWVJꢀ#HTKEC
2ꢁ1ꢁꢀ$QZꢀꢄꢌꢋꢋ
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Appendix A Specifications
328
Paper Specifications
HP LaserJet printers produce excellent print quality. This printer accepts a
variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper (including recycled paper),
envelopes, labels, transparencies, and custom-size paper. Properties such as
weight, grain, and moisture content are important factors affecting printer
performance and output quality.
The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in accordance
with the guidelines in this manual. Paper that does not meet these guidelines
may cause the following problems:
z poor print quality
z increased paper jams and multiple-sheet feeds
z premature wear on the printer, requiring repair
Continued on next page.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
329
Note
For best results, use only HP brand paper and print media. Hewlett-Packard
Company cannot recommend the use of other brands. Because they are
not HP products, HP cannot influence or control their quality.
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this manual and still
not produce satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper
handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables
over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
Before purchasing a large quantity of paper, make sure it meets the
requirements specified in this user guide and in the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Paper Specification Guide. (To order the guide, see page 38.)
Always test paper before purchasing a large quantity.
CAUTION
Using paper outside HP specifications may cause problems for the printer,
requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty
or service agreements.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
330
Supported Sizes of Paper for Input and Output
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Weight
Tray 1
(multipurpose)
up to 100 sheets z Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Executive, A5, Legal, 11 x 17,
ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4,
16 to 53 lb Bond
(60 to 199 g/m2)
Two-sided: 16 to
28 lb Bond
JPostD, 8K, 16K, JIS EXEC
(60 to 105 g/m2)
z Custom sizes:
Minimum: 3.9 x 7.5 in.
(98 x 191 mm)
Maximum: 11.7 x 17.7 in.
(297 x 450 mm)
Note
You may print on both sides of
paper that is equal to or larger
than 5 x 7.5 in. (127 x 191 mm).
z Other media types:
transparencies, envelopes,
and labels
Note
It is best to use Tray 1 when
printing envelopes,
transparencies, and labels.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
331
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Weight
Tray 2 and
Optional
up to 500 sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray
(Tray 4)
Tray 3 and
Optional
up to 500 sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
2 x 500-sheet
Input Tray
(Tray 5)
Optional
up to 2000
sheets
Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
2000-sheet
Input Tray
(Tray 4)
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
332
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Weight
Optional Custom up to 500 sheets z Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Paper Trays
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3,
(Trays 3 and 5)
11 x 17, 8K, 16K, JIS EXEC
z Custom sizes:
Minimum: 3.9 x 7.5 in.
(98 x 191 mm)
Maximum: 11.7 x 17.7 in.
(297 x 450 mm)
Standard
Output Bin
(face-down)
up to 500 sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5,
Executive, Legal, 11 x 17, ISO
A3, JIS B5, JIS B4
Face-up Bin
up to 100 sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5,
Executive, Legal, 11 x 17, ISO
A3, JIS B5, JIS B4, 2X PostCard,
B5 Envelope, Com10 Envelope,
C5 Envelope, DL Envelope,
Monarch
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
333
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Weight
5-bin Mailbox
up to 250 sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Face-down Bin:
with Stapler and per bin
8-bin Mailbox
Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17, 16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Executive, envelopes,
transparencies, labels
Note:
Envelopes, transparencies, and
labels are only supported in the
Face-up Bin.
Face-up Bin
16 to 35 lb
(60 to 135 g/m2)
The staple bin only supports A4
and Letter paper sizes.
7-bin Tabletop
Mailbox
up to 120 sheets Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4,
Face-down Bin
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
per bin
Legal, envelopes,
transparencies, labels
Note: Envelopes, transparencies,
and labels are only supported in
the Face-up Bin.
Face-up Bin
16 to 53 lb
(60 to 199 g/m2)
Envelope
Feeder
up to 100
envelopes
Envelope sizes: Commercial
#10, C5, DL, Monarch, ISO B5,
JPostD
16 to 24 lb
(60 to 90 g/m2)
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
335
Supported Types of Paper
The printer supports the following types of paper:
z plain
z preprinted
z prepunched
z bond
z transparency* (see page 342)
z labels* (see page 341)
z recycled
z color
z rough
z card stock (see page 346)
z user-defined (5 types)
* Only supported in Tray 1.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
336
Guidelines for Using Paper
For best results, use conventional 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper. Make sure the paper
is of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust,
wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges.
If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or
recycled), check the label on the package of paper.
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to the printer.
Symptom
Problem with Paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner
adhesion.
Too moist, too rough, too
smooth, or embossed; faulty (see page 146). Try another
Consider variable fusing
Problems with feeding.
paper lot.
kind of paper, between 100-
250 Sheffield, 4-6% moisture
content.
Dropouts, jamming, curl.
Stored improperly.
Store paper flat in its
moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background Too heavy.
shading.
Use lighter paper.
Open the Face-up Bin.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
337
Symptom
Problem with Paper
Solution
Excessive curl.
Problems with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain
direction or short-grain
construction.
Open the Face-up Bin.
Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, damage to printer. Cutouts or perforations.
Do not use paper with
cutouts or perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Ragged edges.
Use good quality paper.
Note
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks, such
as those used in some types of thermography.
Do not use raised letterhead.
The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make sure
that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible
with the printer’s temperature (392° F or 200° C for 0.1 second).
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
338
Paper Weight Equivalence Table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight
specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the
equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the
bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the row to the cover
weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb.
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.
Paper Weight Equivalence
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S. Tag Europe Japan
Post
Bond
Weight Book
(lb)
Text/
Cover
Bristol Index
Weight Metric
Metric
Carda
thick-
ness
(mm)
Weight Weight Weight (lb)
Weight Weight
(g/m2)
(g/m2)
Weight (lb)
(lb)
(lb)
(lb)
16
17
20
41
43
50
22
24
28
27
29
34
33
35
42
37
39
46
60
64
75
60
64
75
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
339
Paper Weight Equivalence (continued)
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S. Tag Europe Japan
Post
Bond
Weight Book
(lb)
Text/
Cover
Bristol Index
Weight Metric
Metric
Carda
thick-
ness
(mm)
Weight Weight Weight (lb)
Weight Weight
(g/m2)
(g/m2)
Weight (lb)
(lb)
(lb)
(lb)
21
22
24
27
28
32
34
36
39
54
56
60
68
70
80
86
90
100
30
31
33
37
39
44
47
50
55
36
38
41
45
49
55
58
62
67
44
46
50
55
58
67
71
75
82
49
51
55
61
65
74
79
83
91
80
80
81
81
90
90
100
105
120
128
135
148
100
105
120
128
135
148
.18
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
340
Paper Weight Equivalence (continued)
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S.
U.S. Tag Europe Japan
Post
Bond
Weight Book
(lb)
Text/
Cover
Bristol Index
Weight Metric
Metric
Carda
thick-
ness
(mm)
Weight Weight Weight (lb)
Weight Weight
(g/m2)
(g/m2)
Weight (lb)
(lb)
(lb)
(lb)
.19
.20
.23
42
43
47
53
107
110
119
134
58
60
65
74
72
74
80
90
87
97
157
163
176
199
157
163
176
199
90
100
108
122
97
110
a. U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
341
Labels
Note
For best results, use only Tray 1 and the Face-up Bin.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels recommended for use in
laser printers.
Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once.
Label Construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
z Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 392° F (200° C), the
printer’s maximum temperature.
z Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious
jams.
z Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 0.5 inch
(13 mm) of curl in any direction.
z Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of
separation.
To print sheets of labels, see page 124.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
342
Transparencies
Note
For best results, use only Tray 1 and the Face-up Bin.
CAUTION
Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 392° F
(200° C), the printer’s maximum temperature. To avoid damaging the
printer, use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers.
If you have problems printing transparencies, use Tray 1.
To print transparencies, see page 126.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
343
Envelopes
Note
For best results, use only Tray 1 or the envelope feeder and the Face-up
Bin.
Envelope Construction
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not
only between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same
the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following components:
z Weight: See page 333 for supported envelope weight.
z Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than
0.25 inch (6 mm) curl and should not contain air. (Envelopes that trap air
may cause problems.)
z Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise
damaged.
z Sizes in Tray 1: See page 330 for supported paper sizes.
z Sizes in the optional envelope feeder: From 3.5 x 6.3 inches (90 x 160 mm)
to 7 x 10 inches (178 x 254 mm).
Continued on next page.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
If you do not have an optional envelope feeder, print envelopes from Tray 1,
344
see page 119. To print envelopes with the optional envelope feeder, see
page 115. If envelopes wrinkle, see page 226.
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams
Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the
envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more likely to wrinkle.
Be sure the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as
illustrated below.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
345
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds
over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the
printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Envelope Margins
The following table gives typical address margins for a Commercial #10 or DL
envelope.
Type of Address
Return Address
Delivery Address
Top Margin
Left Margin
0.5 in. (15 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)
0.6 in. (15 mm)
4 in. (85 mm)
Note
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 0.6 inch
(15 millimeters) from the edges of the envelope.
Envelope Storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality. Envelopes
should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble,
then the envelope may wrinkle during printing.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
346
Card Stock and Heavy Paper
Note
For best results, use the Standard Output Bin.
Many types of card stock, including postcards, can be printed from Tray 1.
Some card stock performs better than others because its construction is better
suited for feeding through a laser printer.
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 53 lb
(199 g/m2) in Tray 1 or 28 lb (105 g/m2) in other trays. Paper that is too heavy
might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor
print quality, or excessive mechanical wear.
Note
Printing on heavier paper may be possible if the tray is not filled to capacity,
and paper with a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield is used.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
347
Card Stock Construction
z Smoothness: 36-53 lb (135-199 g/m2) card stock should have a
smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield. 16-36 lb (60-135 g/m2) card stock
should have a smoothness rating of 100-250 Sheffield.
z Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 0.2 inch (5 mm) of
curl.
z Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise
damaged.
z Sizes: See page 330.
Note
Before loading card stock in Tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape and
not damaged. Also, make sure the cards are not stuck together.
Card Stock Guidelines
Set margins at least 0.08 inch (2 mm) away from the edges of the paper.
Paper Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
351
Environmental Specifications
Printer State
Power Consumption
(average, in watts,
base unit)
Power Consumption
(average, in watts,
fully configured unit)
Printing
(100-127V units)
(220-240V units)
700 Watts
710 Watts
710 Watts
720 Watts
Standby
(100-127V units)
(220-240V units)
145 Watts
145 Watts
155 Watts
155 Watts
Power Save 1
(default activation
time 60 minutes)
30 Watts
32 Watts
38 Watts (100-127V units)
40 Watts (220-240V units)
Power Save 2
20 Watts
22 Watts
22 Watts (100-127V units)
24 Watts (220-240V units)
(default activation
time 10 minutes after Power
Save 1 starts, if nothing else
happens)
Off
0 Watts
0.25 Watts (100-127V units)
0.25 Watts (220-240V units)
Printer Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
352
Minimum Recommended Circuit Capacity
100-127 Volt
15.0 amps
6.5 amps
220-240 Volt
Power Requirements (Acceptable Line Voltage)
100-127 Volt (+/- 10%)
220-240 Volt (+/- 10%)
220 Volt (+/- 10%)
50-60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
50 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
Acoustic Emissions (Per ISO 9296)
Operating (Printing)a
Power Save 1/ Power Save 2
Standby
Sound Power Level
6.9 Bel
5.2 Bel
inaudible
Printer Specifications
Appendix A Specifications
353
Acoustic Emissions (Per ISO 9296)
Operating (Printing)a
Power Save 1/ Power Save 2
Standby
Sound Pressure Level,
pAm (Bystander Position)
53 dB
59 dB
36 dB
inaudible
L
Sound Pressure Level,
LpAm (Operator Position)
41 dB
inaudible
a. Print speed is 32 ppm
General Specifications
Operating temperature
Relative Humidity
50-91° F (10-32.5° C)
20-80%
Speed, in pages per minute (ppm)
Expandable Memory
32 ppm
Up to 192 MB total, combining standard and
accessory memory DIMMs.
Printer Specifications
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
354
Control Panel Menus
B
Overview
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the
printer driver or software application. This is the most convenient way to
control the printer and will override the printer’s control panel settings. See the
help files associated with the software, or for more information on accessing
the printer driver, see page 56.
You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer’s control
panel. Use the control panel to access printer features not supported by the
printer driver or software application.
Note
Printer driver and software commands override the printer’s control panel
settings.
Continued on next page.
Overview
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
You can print a menu map from the control panel that shows the current printer
355
configuration (page 281).
This appendix lists all the items and possible values for the printer. (Default
values are listed in the “Item” column.)
Additional menu items can appear in the control panel, depending on the
options currently installed in the printer.
This appendix includes:
z Quick Copy Jobs Menu
z Private/Stored Jobs Menu
z Information Menu
z Paper Handling Menu
z Printing Menu
z Configuration Menu
z Configuration of MBM Menu
z I/O Menu
z EIO Menu (8100 N/8100 DN)
z Resets Menu
Overview
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
356
Quick Copy Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard
disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. See Quick
Copying a Job on page 151 and Proofing and Holding a Job on page 153 for
more information about using this menu.
Note
If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk, this menu
is not displayed on the control panel.
Item
Value
Explanation
[JOBNAME]
COPIES=1
The name of the person who owns the quick copy job.
1 to 999
DELETE
The number of additional copies the user wants to
print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the
job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk.
Quick Copy Jobs Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
357
Private/Stored Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the printer’s hard
disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. See
Printing a Private Job on page 155 and Storing a Print Job on page 157 for
more information about using this menu.
Note
If there are no private or stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk, this menu
is not displayed on the control panel.
Item
Value
Explanation
[JOBNAME]
PIN:0000
The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard disk.
To print the job, the user must enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job in the
driver.
COPIES=1
1 to 999
DELETE
The number of copies the user wants to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the
job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk.
Private/Stored Jobs Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
358
Information Menu
This menu contains printer information pages that give details about the
printer and its configuration. To print an information page, scroll to the desired
page and press S
.
ELECT
.
Item
Explanation
PRINT
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the control panel
menu items. For more information, see page 281.
MENU MAP
PRINT
The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration. If an
CONFIGURATION HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet 8100 N and
8100 DN printers), a JetDirect configuration page will print out as well.
For more information, see page 278.
PRINT
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the
PCL FONT LIST printer. For more information, see page 282.
PRINT
PS FONT LIST
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the printer.
For more information, see page 282.
Information Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
359
Item
Explanation
PRINT
This item appears only when a mass storage device (such as an optional
FILE DIRECTORY flash DIMM or hard disk) containing a recognized file system is installed
in the printer. The file directory shows information for all installed mass
storage devices. For more information, see page 284.
PRINT
The event log lists printer events or errors.
EVENT LOG
SHOW
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the control
EVENT LOG
panel display. Press - V
+ to scroll through the event log entries.
ALUE
PRINT
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is working
PAPER PATH
TEST
properly or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper.
Choose the input tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and number of
copies.
Note
If a stapler is installed and is a valid destination, pressing C
J
ANCEL OB
to
cancel the paper path test may not work as exepcted. In this case, press
G . When the printer stops printing and displays OFFLINE, turn the printer
O
off, and then turn the printer on.
PRINT USAGE
PAGE
The Usage Page contains information that could be used for cost
accounting. This item will only show up if a hard disk is installed.
Information Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
360
Paper Handling Menu
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control
panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper from the printer
driver or software application. For more information, see page 144.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be accessed
from a software application or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver
is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control
panel settings. For more information, see page 135.
Item
Values
Explanation
ENVELOPE
FEEDER
For supported This item appears only when the optional envelope
paper sizes, see feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the
SIZE=COM10
page 330.
envelope size currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
Note
The default indicated here is for 110V printers. The
default envelope size for 220V printers is DL.
ENVELOPE
FEEDER
For supported This item appears only when the optional envelope
paper types, feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the
see page 335. envelope type currently loaded in the envelope feeder.
TYPE=PLAIN
Paper Handling Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
361
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 1 MODE= FIRST
Determine how the printer will use Tray 1.
FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer will pull
paper from that tray first.
FIRST
CASSETTE
CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1
using the TRAY 1 SIZEoption (the next item in this menu
when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1 to be
used as a reserved tray.
For more information, see page 141.
TRAY 1 SIZE=
LETTER
For supported This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE.
paper sizes, see Set the value to correspond with the paper size
page 335.
currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 1 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE.
paper types, Set the value to correspond with the paper type
see page 335. currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 2 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type
paper types,
currently loaded in Tray 2.
see page 335.
TRAY 3 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type
paper types,
currently loaded in Tray 3.
see page 335.
Paper Handling Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
362
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 4 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported This item appears only when a fourth paper tray is
paper types, installed. Set the value to correspond with the paper
see page 335. type currently loaded in Tray 4.
TRAY 5 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported This item appears only when a fifth paper tray is
paper types,
installed. Set the value to correspond with the paper
see page 335. type currently loaded in Tray 5.
PAPER DEST= STANDARD OUTBIN OPTIONAL BIN x appears only when a mailbox is
STANDARD OUTBIN LEFT OUTBIN
installed. Set the value to correspond with the
appropriate bin.
OPTIONAL
BIN x
MANUAL
FEED=OFF
OFF
ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than
automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and
Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it
receives a print job and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER
SIZE].
For more information, see page 143.
Paper Handling Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
363
Item
Values
Explanation
DUPLEX=OFF
OFF
ON
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is
installed. Set the value to ON to print on both sides
(duplex) or OFFto print on one side (simplex) of a sheet
of paper.
For more information, see page 110.
BINDING=
LONG EDGE
This item appears only when an optional duplexer is
installed and the duplex option is on. Choose the
binding edge when duplexing (printing on both sides of
paper).
LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
For more information, see page 110.
OVERRIDE
NO
Choose YES to print on letter size paper when an A4
job is sent, but no A4 size paper is loaded in the printer
(or to print on A4 size paper when a letter job is sent,
but no letter paper is loaded in the printer).
A4/LETTER=NO YES
Paper Handling Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
364
Item
Values
Explanation
CONFIGURE
FUSER MODE
MENU=NO
NO
type. (This is only necessary if you are experiencing
problems printing on certain paper types.)
NO: The fuser mode menu items are not accessible.
YES: Additional items appear (see [TYPE]=NORMAL on
page 365).
YES
The fuser mode can only be changed from this menu
option in the control panel.
Note
To see the default fuser mode for each paper type,
select YES, scroll back to the Information Menu, and
print a menu map (page 358).
Paper Handling Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
365
Item
Values
Explanation
[TYPE]=NORMAL NORMAL
This item appears only when CONFIGURE FUSER MODE
MENU=YES. The printer speeds are for Letter or A4.
NORMAL: Normal temperature, prints at 32 ppm.
LOW: Low temperature, prints at 32 ppm.
HIGH1: Raises the temperature, prints at 32 ppm.
HIGH2: Raises the temperature, prints at 24 ppm.
HIGH3: Raises the temperature, prints at 16 ppm.
Most paper types are set to NORMAL by default. The
exceptions are as follows:
LOW
HIGH1
HIGH2
HIGH3
TRNSPRNCY=LOW
LABELS=HIGH1
CARDSTOCK=HIGH2
ROUGH=HIGH1
For a complete list of supported paper types, see page
335.
CAUTION
If you change the fuser mode to HIGH1, HIGH2, or HIGH3,
be sure to change it back to the default when you are
done printing. Setting a paper type to HIGH1, HIGH2, or
HIGH3 might shorten the life of some consumables,
such as the fuser, and might cause other failures or
jams.
Paper Handling Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
366
Print Quality Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application or from
the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and
software application settings override control panel settings. For more
information, see page 135.
Item
Values
Explanation
RESOLUTION= 300
FASTRES 1200 600
Select the resolution from the following values:
300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s maximum
FASTRES 1200speed (32 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is recommended for
some bitmapped fonts and graphics, and for compatibility
with the HP LaserJet III family of printers.
600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s maximum
speed (32 ppm).
FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (comparable to
1200 dpi) at the printer’s maximum speed (32 ppm).
Note
It is best to change the resolution from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
Print Quality Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
367
Item
Values
Explanation
RET=MEDIUM OFF
LIGHT
MEDIUM
DARK
Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
setting to produce print with smooth angles, curves, and
edges.
All print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit from
REt.
Note
It is best to change the REt setting from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
ECONOMODE=OFF OFF
Turn EconoMode on (to save toner) or off (for high quality).
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the
amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%.
CAUTION
ON
HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. (If
EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner
supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the toner
cartridge.)
Note
It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver
or software application. (Driver and software settings
override control panel settings.)
Print Quality Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
368
Item
Values
Explanation
TONER
1
Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the
toner density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to 5
(dark), but the default setting of 3 usually produces the best
results.
DENSITY=3 2
3
4
5
Use a lower toner density setting to save toner.
CREATE
No value to Press S
to print a cleaning page (for cleaning excess
ELECT
CLEANING PAGE select.
toner from the paper path).
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the
page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
Follow the instructions on the cleaning page.
PROCESS
No value to This item appears only after a cleaning page has been
CLEANING PAGE select.
generated (as described above).
Press S to process the cleaning page.
ELECT
Print Quality Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
369
Printing Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer
driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application
settings override control panel settings. For more information, see page 135.
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES=1
1 to 999
Set the default number of copies by selecting any number
from 1 to 999. Press - V
+ once to change the setting
ALUE
by increments of 1, or hold down - V
+ to scroll by
ALUE
increments of 10.
Note
It is best to set the number of copies from the printer
driver or software application. (Driver and software
settings override control panel settings.)
Printing Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
370
Item
Values
Explanation
PAPER=
LETTER
For
Set the default image size for paper and envelopes. (The
supported item name will change from paper to envelope as you
(110V printers) paper
scroll through the available sizes.)
or
PAPER=
sizes, see
page 330.
A4
(220V printers)
and
ENVELOPE=
COM10
(110V printers)
or
ENVELOPE=
DL
(220V printers)
CONFIGURE
NO
NO: The custom paper menu items are not accessible.
YES: The custom paper menu items appear (see below).
CUSTOM PAPER=NO YES
Printing Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
371
Item
Values
Explanation
UNIT OF
INCHES
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES.
MEASURE=INCHES MILLIMETERS Select the unit of measurement for the custom paper size.
(110V printers)
or
MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
X DIMENSION=
11.7 INCHES
(110V printers)
or
For
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES.
supported Select the dimension to be fed into the printer (short
paper
sizes, see
edge).
297 MILLIMETERS page 330.
(220V printers)
Y DIMENSION=
17.7 INCHES
(110V printers)
or
For
This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES.
supported Select the other dimension (long edge).
paper
sizes, see
450 MILLIMETERS page 330.
(220V printers)
Printing Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
372
Item
Values
Explanation
FORM=60 LINES 5 to 128
(110V printers)
or
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper
size. Press - V
+ once to change the setting by
ALUE
increments of 1, or hold down - V
+ to scroll by
ALUE
64 LINES
increments of 10.
(220V printers)
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Determine the default orientation of print on the page.
Note
It is best to set the page orientation from the printer driver
or software application. (Driver and software settings
override control panel settings.)
PCL FONT
INTERNAL INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
SOFT: Permanent soft fonts.
SLOT 1, 2, SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three DIMM
SOURCE=INTERNAL SOFT
or 3
slots.
PCL FONT
NUMBER=0
0 to 999
The printer assigns a number to each font and lists them
on the PCL Font List (page 282). The font number
appears in the Font # column of the printout.
Printing Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
373
Item
Values
Explanation
PCL FONT
0.44 to
99.99
This item might not appear, depending on the font
PITCH=10.00
selected. Press - V
+ once to change setting by
ALUE
increments of .01 for pitch, or hold down - V
+ to scroll
ALUE
by increments of 1.
PCL FONT POINT 4.00 to
This item might not appear, depending on the font
selected. Press - V + once to change setting by
SIZE=12.00
999.75
ALUE
increments of .25 for point size, or hold down - V
+ to
ALUE
scroll by increments of 1.
PCL SYMBOL
SET=PC-8
PC-8
Select any one of several available symbol sets from the
printer’s control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping
of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is
recommended for line draw characters.
many
others
COURIER=REGULAR REGULAR
DARK
Select the version of Courier font to use:
REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet 4 series printers.
DARK: The internal Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet III series printers.
Both fonts are not available at the same time.
Printing Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
374
Item
Values
Explanation
WIDE A4=NO
NO
The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters
that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one
line.
YES
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one
line.
APPEND CR TO
LF=NO
NO
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed
encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text,
no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX,
indicate a new line using only the line feed control code.
This option allows the user to append the required
carriage return to each line feed.
YES
PRINT PS
OFF
ON
Select ONto print the PS error page when PS errors occur.
ERRORS=OFF
Printing Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
375
Configuration Menu
Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer according
to your printing needs.
Item
Values
Explanation
POWERSAVE= OFF
1 HOUR 15 MINUTES
Set the printer to enter Power Save after it has been idle
for a specified amount of time. Turning Power Save off is
not recommended. The Power Save feature does the
following:
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
3 HOURS
z Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the
printer when it is idle.
z Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components.
(Turns off the display’s backlight.)
z When you send a print job, press a control panel key,
open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer
automatically comes out of Power Save mode.
Note
Power Save turns off the backlight on the display, but the
display is still readable.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
376
Item
Values
Explanation
PERSONALITY= AUTO
AUTO PCL
PS
Select the default printer language (personality).
Possible values are determined by which valid languages
are installed in the printer.
Normally you should not change the printer language
(the default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific printer
language, the printer will not automatically switch from
one language to another unless specific software
commands are sent to the printer.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
377
Item
Values
Explanation
RESOURCE
SAVE=OFF
OFF
ON
This item dedicates printer memory to save each
language’s permanent resources. (You might need to add
memory to the printer in order for this item to appear.)
The amount of memory set aside can be different for
each installed language. Some languages might have
memory set aside for resource saving without requiring
all languages to do so. Any time the amount of memory
dedicated to a specific language is changed, all
languages will lose all saved resources, including any
unprocessed print jobs.
AUTO
OFF: No language resource saving is performed, and
language-dependent resources, such as fonts and
macros, are lost when language or resolution changes.
ON: An item will appear for each installed language that
allows the user to allocate a particular amount of memory
to that language’s resource saving area. (See the items
below.)
AUTO: The printer automatically determines the amount of
memory to use for each installed language’s resource
saving area.
For more information, see page 401.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
378
Item
Values
Explanation
PCL MEMORY= 0K and up
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. Select
the amount of memory used for saving PCL resources.
Printer default is the minimum amount of memory needed
400K
(This value
depends on
the amount of to perform resource saving for PCL. Press - V
+ to
ALUE
installed
change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by
memory.)
increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
For more information, see page 401.
PS MEMORY= 0K and up
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. Select
the amount of memory used for saving PS resources.
Printer default is the minimum amount of memory needed
400K
(This value
depends on
the amount of to perform resource saving for PS. Press - V
+ to
ALUE
installed
change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by
memory.)
increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
For more information, see page 401.
PAGE PROTECT= AUTO
AUTO ON
This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX,
PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message displays (page 211).
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) attempts to
guarantee that all pages will print. If the page does not
print, turn PAGE PROTECT to ON. This might increase
chances of a 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the print job or
install additional memory (page 392).
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
379
Item
Values
Explanation
CLEARABLE
JOB
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is
displayed on the printer’s control panel.
WARNINGS=JOB ON
JOB: Warning messages display on the control panel until
the end of the job from which they were generated.
ON: Warning messages display on the control panel until
G is pressed.
O
AUTO
ON
This item determines how the printer reacts to errors.
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message
will display, and the printer will go offline for 10 seconds
before returning online.
CONTINUE=ON OFF
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the
message will remain on the display and the printer will
remain offline until G is pressed.
O
TONER
CONTINUE
This item determines how the printer behaves when toner
is low. The TONER LOW message will first appear when the
toner cartridge is almost out of toner. (About 100 to 300
sheets can still be printed.)
LOW=CONTINUE STOP
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print while the TONER
LOW message is displayed.
STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for further action.
For more information, see page 165.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
380
Item
Values
Explanation
RAM DISK=AUTO OFF
This item determines how the RAM disk is configured.
This item appears only if there is no optional hard disk
installed and the printer has at least 12 MB of memory.
OFF: The RAM disk is disabled.
ON
AUTO
ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the amount of
memory to be used through the following item: RAM DISK
SIZE.
Note
If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or from OFF to
AUTO, the printer will automatically reinitialize when it
becomes idle.
RAM DISK
SIZE=xxxK
0K and up
(This value
depends on
This item determines the size of the RAM disk. This item
appears if RAM DISK=ON or AUTO.
Press - V
+ to change settings by increments of 100.
ALUE
the amount of Note
installed
memory.)
This setting cannot be changed if RAM DISK=AUTO.
Changing this value will cause the printer to reinitialize
when it becomes idle.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
381
Item
Values
Explanation
JAM RECOVERY= AUTO
AUTO ON
OFF
This item determines how the printer behaves when a
paper jam occurs.
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for
printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default
setting.
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a paper
jam is cleared.
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a paper
jam. Printing performance might be increased with this
setting.
MAINTENANCE OFF
MESSAGE=OFF
This item appears only after the PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE message displays.
OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be
cleared. If you do not replace the maintenance kit, the
PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be displayed
again after approximately 17,500 pages.
The message should not be turned off unless the printer
maintenance has been performed. If the required
maintenance is not performed, the printer’s performance
will degrade.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
382
Item
Values
Explanation
NEW TONER
YES
This item allows the user to tell the printer that a new
toner cartridge has been installed. Setting this item to
YES will reset the HP TonerGauge to full.
CARTRIDGE=NO NO
QUICK COPY 1 to 50
JOBS=32
Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that can be
stored on the printer’s hard disk.
Configuration Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
383
Configuration of MBM Menu
This menu defines the operating mode for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, 8-bin
Mailbox, or 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler.
Item
Value
Explanation
OPERATION MAILBOX
MODE: STACKER
MAILBOX
Defines the operating mode for the multibin mailbox that is
installed.
JOB SEPARATOR MAILBOX: Each bin can be addressed individually as the
COLLATOR
destination and can have a name assigned to it by the
network or printer administrator.
STACKER: Stacks the output from the lowest bin to the top,
regardless of job boundaries. This operating mode takes
advantage of the total capacity of the bins. The software
sees the multibin mailbox as one logical bin.
JOB SEPARATOR: Automatically separates incoming jobs,
which may have multiple copies, and assigns a bin to each.
It uses all the bins, but the software sees the multibin
mailbox as one logical bin. If a bin is full, the printer
automatically sends the job to the next available bin.
COLLATOR: Automatically separates mopies. Each mopy is
delivered in consecutive bins, starting with the Face-up Bin.
Configuration of MBM Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
384
I/O Menu
Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication between the
printer and the computer.
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15 5 to 300
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O timeout
refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer
waits before ending a print job.)
This setting allows you to adjust timeout for best
performance. If data from other ports appear in the middle
of your print job, increase the timeout value.
Press - V
+ once to change settings by increments of
ALUE
1, or hold down - V
+ to scroll by increments of 10.
ALUE
I/O Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
385
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O BUFFER=AUTO AUTO
Allocate memory for I/O buffering.
ON
AUTO: The printer automatically reserves memory for I/O
buffering. Additional configurations are not required and
the I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not appear.
ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZEitem appears (see below). Specify
the amount of memory to be used for I/O buffering.
OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the I/O BUFFER
SIZE item does not appear.
OFF
When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any downloaded
resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be
downloaded again, unless they are stored on an optional
hard disk or flash DIMM.
For more information, see page 403.
I/O BUFFER
SIZE=
10K and up This item appears only when I/O BUFFER=ON. Specify the
amount of memory for I/O buffering. The maximum
amount of memory available for I/O buffering is
100K
determined by the amount of memory installed in the
printer, the languages installed in the printer, and by other
memory allocations that must be made.
Press - V
+ to change settings by increments of 10 (up
ALUE
to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
I/O Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
386
Item
Values
Explanation
PARALLEL HIGH YES
SPEED=YES NO
Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the
printer.
YES: The printer accepts faster parallel communications
used for connections with newer computers.
NO: The printer accepts slower parallel communications
used for connections with older computers.
PARALLEL ADV ON
FUNCTIONS=ON OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off.
The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port
(IEEE-1284).
This setting allows the printer to send status readback
messages to the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced
functions on might slow language switching.)
I/O Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
387
EIO Menu (8100 N/8100 DN)
EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular accessory
product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer contains an
HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking
parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other parameters can also be
configured through HP JetAdmin.
Item
Values
Explanation
CFG NETWORK=NO NO
YES
NO: The JetDirect Menu is not accessible.
YES: The JetDirect Menu appears.
IPX/SPX=ON
ON
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in Novell
NetWare networks, for example) is enabled (on) or
disabled (off).
OFF
DLC/LLC=ON
TCP/IP=ON
ON
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is enabled (on)
or disabled (off).
OFF
ON
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is enabled (on)
or disabled (off).
OFF
EIO Menu (8100 N/8100 DN)
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
388
Item
Values
Explanation
ETALK=ON
ON
Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol stack is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
OFF
CFG IPX/SPX=NO NO
YES
NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible.
YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the IPX/SPX Menu,
you can specify the frame type parameter used on your
network. The default is AUTO, to automatically set and limit
the frame type to the one detected.
For Ethernet cards, frame type selections include EN_8023,
EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP.
For Token Ring cards, frame type selections include
TR_8022, TR_SNAP.
In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you can also
specify NetWare Source Routing parameters, which
include SRC RT=AUTO (default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT.
EIO Menu (8100 N/8100 DN)
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
389
Item
Values
Explanation
CFG TCP/IP=NO NO
YES
NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible.
YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP Menu, you
can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP parameters to be
automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when
the printer is turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO, you can
manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from the control
panel. You can manually set each byte of the IP address
(IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog Server (LG), and Default
Gateway (GW). For example:
192.0.0.192
Byte 4
Byte 1
Byte 3
Byte 2
If the Syslog Server IP address is left blank, the printer will
still work. Also, you can manually set the Timeout time
period.
CFG ETALK=NO NO
YES
NO: The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible.
YES: The EtherTalk Menu appears. In the EtherTalk Menu
you can set the AppleTalk phase parameter (ETALK PHASE=1
or 2) for your network.
EIO Menu (8100 N/8100 DN)
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
390
Resets Menu
Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer
configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset the printer
under the following circumstances:
z You want to restore the printer’s default settings.
z Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted.
z You are having problems with a port.
The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer, while C
ANCEL
J
clears only the current job.
OB
Item
Explanation
RESET MEMORY
This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and
makes the control panel defaults current.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS
This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory
(default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active
I/O.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
Resets Menu
Appendix B Control Panel Menus
391
Item
Explanation
RESET ACTIVE I/O This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output
CHANNEL
buffers (for the active I/Os only).
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESET ALL I/O
CHANNELS
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output
buffers for all I/Os.
Resets Menu
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
392
Printer Memory and
C
Expansion
Overview
The printer has three dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slots for upgrading
with:
z More printer memory. DIMMs are available in 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 MB, for a
maximum of 192 MB.
z Flash memory DIMMs, available in 2 and 4 MB. Unlike standard printer
memory, flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items
in the printer, even when the printer is off.
z DIMM-based accessory fonts, macros, and patterns.
Continued on next page.
Overview
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
393
z Other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options.
Note
Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) used on previous HP LaserJet
printers are not compatible with this printer.
You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often do one or more
of the following: print complex graphics or PS documents, print with the
optional duplexer, use many downloaded fonts, and print large paper sizes
(such as A3, B4, or 11 x 17).
The printer has three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots for expanding the
printer’s capabilities with:
z One or more network cards.
For ordering information, see page 43.
installed in the EIO slots, print a configuration page (page 278).
This appendix includes:
z Determining Memory Requirements
z Installing Memory
Continued on next page.
Overview
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
395
Determining Memory Requirements
The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you
print. Your print engine can print most text and graphics at 1200 dpi FastRes
without additional memory.
Add memory to your printer if you:
z Commonly print complex graphics.
z Use many temporarily downloaded fonts.
z Print complex documents.
z Print two-sided PS documents.
z Use advanced functions (such as I/O Buffering and Resource Saving).
The following table presents the amount of memory required for most common
print jobs using FastRes 1200 dpi printing.
Continued on next page.
Determining Memory Requirements
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
396
Print Job
Paper Size
PCL Minimum
Memory
PS Minimum
Memory
Requirements
Requirements
single-sided printing
two-sided printing
Letter, A4, Legal
11 x 17 inch, A3
Letter, A4
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
24 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
24 MB
Legal
11 x 17 inch, A3
Determining Memory Requirements
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
397
Installing Memory
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage dual in-line
memory modules (DIMMs). When handling
DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap or
frequently touch the surface of the DIMM’s
antistatic package, then touch bare metal on the
printer.
If you have not already done so, print a
configuration page to find out how much
memory is installed in the printer before adding
more memory (page 278).
1
2
1 Turn the printer off. Unplug the power cord
and disconnect any cables.
2 Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the
back of the printer.
Continued on next page.
Installing Memory
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
398
3 Grasp the screws and pull the formatter
board out of the printer. Place it on a flat,
non-conductive surface.
3
4 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic
package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against
the side edges and thumbs against the back
edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with
the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each
side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.)
4
5
See Maximum Memory Configuration on
memory for each DIMM slot.
5 Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press
firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of
the DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove
Continued on next page.
Installing Memory
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
399
6 Slide the formatter board back into the
6
7
printer and tighten the two screws.
7 Plug in the power cord and connect all
cables. Turn the printer on.
Maximum Memory Configuration
Slot 1
64 MB
64 MB
64 MB
16 MB
192 MB
Slot 2
Slot 3
Onboard memory
Total
Note
If you install the maximum of 64 MB on Slots 1, 2, and 3, then the printer
discards the 16 MB onboard memory. This has no affect on performance.
Installing Memory
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
400
Checking Memory Installation
Follow this procedure to verify that DIMMs are installed correctly:
1 Check that the printer’s control panel displays READY when the printer is
turned on. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been
incorrectly installed. Check the printer messages (page 278).
2 Print a new configuration page (page 278).
3 Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the
configuration page printed before the DIMM installation. If the amount of
memory has not increased, the DIMM might not be installed correctly
(repeat the installation procedure) or the DIMM might be defective (try a
new DIMM, or try installing the DIMM in a different slot).
Note
If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed
Personalities and Options section on the configuration page. This area
should list the new printer language.
Checking Memory Installation
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
Adjusting Memory Settings
Resource Saving
401
Resource Saving allows the printer to keep downloaded resources (permanent
downloaded fonts, macros, or patterns) in memory when the printer language
or resolution is changed.
If you do not have an optional hard disk or flash DIMM for storing downloaded
resources, you might want to change the amount of memory allocated to each
language when downloading an unusually large number of fonts, or if the
printer is in a shared environment.
The minimum amount of memory that can be allocated to Resource Saving is
400 KB each for PCL and PS.
To determine how much memory to allocate to a language:
1 From the Configuration Menu, set RESOURCE SAVE=ON (page 278). You might
need to add memory to the printer in order for this option to appear in the
printer’s control panel.
2 Also from the Configuration Menu, choose either PCL MEMORY or PS MEMORY
and change the setting to the highest value displayed. This amount will vary
depending upon how much memory is installed in the printer.
Continued on next page.
Adjusting Memory Settings
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
402
3 Using a software application, download all the fonts you want to use in the
selected language.
4 Print a configuration page (page 278). The amount of memory used by the
fonts is listed next to the language. Round this figure up to the nearest
100 KB. (For example, if 475 KB are shown, 500 KB should be reserved.)
5 From the Configuration Menu, set PCL MEMORY or PS MEMORY to the value
determined in step 4.
6 Repeat step 3. (You must download all fonts again. See the note below.)
Note
When you change the Resource Saving setting, all downloaded resources
(such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they
are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
Adjusting Memory Settings
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
403
I/O Buffering
To allow the computer to continue working without waiting for the print job to
finish queuing, the printer uses a portion of its memory (an I/O buffer) to hold
jobs in progress. (If I/O buffering is off, no memory is reserved for this
function.)
In most cases, it is best to let the printer automatically reserve memory for I/O
buffering.
To speed network printing, you might want to increase the amount of memory
reserved for I/O buffering.
To change the I/O Buffer setting:
1 From the I/O Menu, set I/O BUFFER=ON (page 384).
2 Also from the I/O Menu, set I/O SIZE to the desired value.
Note
When you change the I/O Buffer setting, all downloaded resources (such
as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are
stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
Adjusting Memory Settings
Appendix C Printer Memory and Expansion
404
Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage
Turn off the printer before installing the EIO cards or mass storage device.
See the graphic below for orientation and location of the EIO cards or optional
mass storage device, such as a hard disk.
Use HP LaserJet Resource Manager to manage fonts on a mass storage
device (page 73). For more information, see the printer software help.
HP is constantly introducing new software tools for use with your printer and
accessories. These tools are available from the Internet free of charge. See
page 3 for how to visit the HP website for more information.
After you have installed a new device, print a configuration page.
EIO 3
EIO 2
EIO 1
Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage
Appendix D Printer Commands
405
Printer Commands
D
Overview
Most software applications do not require you to enter printer commands. See
your computer and software documentation to find the method for entering
printer commands, if needed.
PCL
PCL printer commands tell the printer which tasks to perform or which fonts to
use. This appendix provides a quick reference for users who are already
familiar with PCL command structure.
Note
Unless PCL 5e backward compatibility is required, HP recommends that
PCL 6 printer drivers be used to take full advantage of all printer features.
The PCL 5e printer driver in this printer is not backward compatible with
older printers that use PCL 5e printer drivers.
Overview
Appendix D Printer Commands
406
HP-GL/2
The printer has the ability to print vector graphics using the HP-GL/2 graphics
language. Printing in the HP-GL/2 language requires that the printer leave
PCL language and enter HP-GL/2 mode, which can be done by sending the
printer PCL code. Some software applications switch languages through their
drivers.
PJL
HP’s Printer Job Language (PJL) provides control above PCL and other printer
languages. The four major functions provided by PJL are: printer language
printer. PJL commands may be used to change printer default settings.
This appendix includes:
z Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax
z Selecting PCL Fonts
z Common PCL Printer Commands
Continued on next page.
Overview
Appendix D Printer Commands
407
Note
The table at the end of this appendix contains commonly used PCL 5e
commands (page 412). For a complete listing and explanation of how to
use PCL, HP-GL/2, and PJL commands, order the PCL 5/PJL Technical
Reference Documentation Package (page 38).
To receive more information about printer commands via fax, call
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Service Technology) and request an
index for HP LaserJet printers. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the
front of this user guide.)
Overview
Appendix D Printer Commands
408
Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax
Before using printer commands, compare these characters:
Lowercase l:
Number one:
l
1
Uppercase O:
Number 0:
O
0
Many printer commands use the lowercase letter l (l) and the number one (1),
or the uppercase letter O (O) and the number zero (0). These characters may
not appear on your screen as shown here. You must use the exact character
and case specified for PCL printer commands.
Escape character
(begins escape sequence)
Value field (contains both
alpha and numeric characters)
Parameterized
character
Group
character
Termination character
(uppercase)
Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax
Appendix D Printer Commands
409
Combining Escape Sequences
Escape sequences may be combined into one escape sequence string. There
are three important rules to follow when combining code:
1 The first two characters after the ? character (the parameterized and group
characters) must be the same in all of the commands to be combined.
2 When combining escape sequences, change the uppercase (termination)
character in each individual escape sequence to lower case.
3 The final character of the combined escape sequence must be uppercase.
The following is an example of an escape sequence string that would be sent
to the printer to select legal paper, landscape orientation, and 8 lines per inch:
?&l3A?&l1O?&l8D
The following escape sequence sends the same printer commands by
combining them into a shorter sequence:
?&l3a1o8D
Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax
Appendix D Printer Commands
410
Entering Escape Characters
Printer commands always begin with the escape character (?).
The following table shows how the escape character can be entered from
various DOS software applications.
DOS Software Application Entry
Lotus 1-2-3 and Symphony Type \027
What Appears
027
Å
Microsoft Word for DOS
Hold down Alt and type 027 on the
numeric keypad
WordPerfect for DOS
MS-DOS Edit
MS-DOS Edlin
dBase
Type <27>
<27>
Å
Hold down Ctrl-P, and press Esc
Hold down Ctrl-V, and press [
?? CHR(27)+"command"
^[
?? CHR(27)+" "
Understanding PCL Printer Command Syntax
Appendix D Printer Commands
411
Selecting PCL Fonts
Print a PCL Font List to view the command for each internal font (page 282). A
sample section is shown below. Notice the two variable boxes for symbol set
and point size.
These variables must be filled in or the printer will use defaults. For example, if
you want a symbol set that contains line-draw characters, select the 10U
listed in the table on page 418.
Note
Fonts are either “fixed” or “proportional” in spacing. The printer contains
both fixed fonts (Courier, Letter Gothic, and Lineprinter) and proportional
fonts (CG Times, Arial, Times New Roman, and others).
Fixed-spaced fonts are generally used in applications such as
spreadsheets and databases, where it is important for columns to line up
vertically. Proportional-spaced fonts are generally used in text and word
processing applications.
Selecting PCL Fonts
Appendix D Printer Commands
412
Common PCL Printer Commands
Function
Command
Options (#)
Job Control Commands
Reset
?E
n/a
Number of Copies
2-sided/1-sided printing
?&l#X
?&l#S
1 to 999
0 = Simplex (1-sided) printing
1 = Duplex (2-sided) with long edge binding
2 = Duplex (2-sided) with short edge binding
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
413
Function
Command
Options (#)
Page Control Commands
Paper Source
?&l#H
0 = prints or ejects current page
1 = Tray 2
2 = manual feed, paper
3 = manual feed, envelope
4 = Tray 1
5 = Tray 3
7 = auto select
8 = Tray 5
20 = Tray 4
21-69 = external trays
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
414
Function
Command
?&l#A
Options (#)
Paper size
1 = Executive
2 = Letter
3 = Legal
6 = 11 x 17
24 = A6
25 = A5
26 = A4
27 = A3
44 = B6-JIS
45 = B5-JIS
46 = B4-JIS
71 = Postcard (single)
72 = Postcard (double)
80 = Monarch
81 = Commercial 10
90 = DL
91 = International C5
100 = B5
101 = Custom
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
415
Function
Command
Options (#)
Paper Type
?&n#
5WdBond = Bond
6WdPlain = Plain
6WdColor = Color
7WdLabels = Labels
9WdRecycled = Recycled
11WdLetterhead = Letterhead
10WdCardstock = Cardstock
11WdPrepunched = Prepunched
11WdPreprinted = Preprinted
13WdTransparency = Transparency
#WdCustompapertype = Custom1
Orientation
Top Margin
?&l#O
?&l#E
0 = Portrait
1 = Landscape
2 = Reverse Portrait
3 = Reverse Landscape
# = number of lines
Text Length (bottom margin) ?&l#F
# = number of lines from top margin
# = column number
Left Margin
?&a#L
?&a#M
Right Margin
# = column number from left margin
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
416
Function
Command
Options (#)
Horizontal Motion Index
?&k#H
1/120-inch increments (compresses print
horizontally)
Vertical Motion Index
Line Spacing
?&l#C
?&l#D
?&l#L
1/48-inch increments (compresses print vertically)
# = lines per inch (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 24, 48)
Perforation Skip
0 = disable
1 = enable
Cursor Positioning
Vertical Position (Rows)
Vertical Position (Dots)
?&a#R
?*p#Y
# = row number
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)
# = column number
Vertical Position (Decipoints) ?&a#V
Horizontal Position
(Columns)
?&a#C
Horizontal Position (Dots)
?*p#X
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
417
Function
Command
Options (#)
Horizontal Position
(Decipoints)
?&a#H
?&s#C
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)
Programming Hints
End of Line Wrap
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
Display Functions On
Display Functions Off
Language Selection
Enter PCL Mode
?Y
?Z
n/a
n/a
?%#A
?%#B
0 = Use previous PCL cursor position
1 = Use current HP-GL/2 pen position
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
0 = Use previous HP-GL/2 pen position
1 = Use current PCL cursor position
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
418
Function
Command
Options (#)
Font Selection
Symbol Sets2
?(#
8U = HP Roman-8 Symbol Set
10U = IBM Layout (PC-8) (code page 437) Default
Symbol Set
12U = IBM Layout for Europe (PC-850) (code page
850)
8M = Math-8
19U = Windows 3.1 Latin 1
9E = Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (commonly used in
Eastern Europe)
5T = Windows 3.1 Latin 5 (commonly used in
Turkey)
579L = Wingdings Font
Primary Spacing
?(s#P
0 = fixed
1 = proportional
Primary Pitch
?(s#H
?&k#S
# = characters/inch
Set Pitch Mode3
0 = 10
4 = 12 (elite)
2 = 16.5 - 16.7 (compressed)
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
419
Function
Command
Options (#)
Primary Height
?(s#V
?(s#S
# = points
Primary Style2
Primary Stroke Wt.2
Typeface2
0 = upright (solid)
1 = italic
4 = condensed
5 = condensed italic
?(s#B
?(s#T
0 = medium (book or text)
1 = semi bold
3 = bold
4 = extra bold
Print a PCL font list to view the command for each
internal font (page 282).
1For custom paper, replace “Custompapertype” with the name of the paper, and replace the
“#” with the number of characters in the name plus 1.
2Order the PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package for symbol set charts or
for more information (page 38).
3The preferred method is to use the primary pitch command.
Common PCL Printer Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
420
Multibin Mailbox Commands
Before using these command strings, determine the device identification
number of the multibin mailbox by printing a configuration page. The device
identification number is located under the heading Installed Personalities and
Options. For more information on printing a configuration page, see page 278.
The printer must be turned off and on after sending the change mode
command in order for the new mode to take effect.
Continued on next page.
Multibin Mailbox Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
421
DMCMD
The device management command changes the mailbox mode for the defined
device.
Syntax:
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX = “asciihexrequest” <CR><LF>
Parameters:
Parameter
ASCIIHEX =
Functional Range
ASCII 33 through 255
Default
N/A
“asciihexrequest”
ASCIIHEX = “asciihexrequest” - This is the string that sends the command to
change the mailbox mode for the device. The first ASCIIHEX command
changes the mailbox mode; the second ASCIIHEX command turns the printer
off and on.@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX = “asciihexrequest” <CR><LF>
Example:
The underlined 3 value is the device value determined from the
configuration page plus one (1).
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX = “0400070104010703030214020104”
<CR><LF>
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX = “040006020501010301040105”
<CR><LF>
Continued on next page.
Multibin Mailbox Commands
Appendix D Printer Commands
422
Example to switch to mailbox mode and turn the
printer off and on
?%-12345X@PJL
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX=”0400070104010703030214020104”
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX=”040006020501010301040105”
?%-12345X
Example to switch to stacker mode and turn the printer
off and on
?%-12345X@PJL
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX=”0400070104010703030214020101”
@PJL DMCMD ASCIIHEX=”040006020501010301040105”
?%-12345X
Continued on next page.
Multibin Mailbox Commands
Appendix E Regulatory Information
425
FCC Regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
z Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
z Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is located.
z Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Note
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved
by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B
limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
FCC Regulations
Appendix E Regulatory Information
426
Environmental Product Stewardship
Protecting the Environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an
environmentally-sound manner. The printer has been designed to minimize
impacts on the environment.
The printer design eliminates:
Ozone
Production
The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and
therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03).
CFC Usage
Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting chemicals
(chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been eliminated from
the manufacturing of the printer and packaging.
Environmental Product Stewardship
Appendix E Regulatory Information
427
The printer design reduces:
Energy
Energy usage drops from 710/720 (110V/220V units) watts (W) during
Consumption printing to as little as 20/22 (110V/220V units) W while in inactive,
Standby mode. This saves energy without affecting the high performance
of the printer. This product qualifies for the ENERGY STAR Program (U.S.
and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage
the development of energy-efficient office products. The ENERGY STAR
name is a registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency.
As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company
has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
Toner
EconoMode uses about 50% less toner, thereby extending the life of the
Consumption toner cartridge.
Paper use
The printer’s optional duplexing feature, which provides for two-sided
printing, reduces paper usage and the resulting demands on natural
resources.
Environmental Product Stewardship
Appendix E Regulatory Information
428
The design of the printer facilitates the recycling of:
Plastics
Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to
international standards, that enhance the ability to identify plastics for
proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life.
HP Toner
Cartridges
In many countries, this product’s toner cartridge/drum can be returned to
HP using the prepaid shipping label and instructions included inside
each new HP Toner Cartridge box. If your country is not listed in the
recycling guide, call your local HP Sales and Service Office for further
instructions.
Continued on next page.
Environmental Product Stewardship
Appendix E Regulatory Information
429
HP Cartridge Recycling Program information:
Since 1990, the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program has
collected more than twelve million cartridges that otherwise may have
been discarded into landfills. Once a cartridge is returned, it is
disassembled and reusable components are cleaned and inspected for
quality conformance. After passing strict inspection procedures,
materials such as nuts, screws, and clips are reclaimed and used to
produce new cartridges. Remaining materials are melted down and used
as raw materials for a variety of other products. Over 95 percent (%) of
the weight of returned materials is recycled. For more information in the
U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies
Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners. Non-US customers can
call the local HP Sales and Service Office for further information
regarding the HP Toner Cartridge Recycling Program.
Paper
The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper
meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper
Specifications Guide.
Environmental Product Stewardship
Appendix E Regulatory Information
430
To ensure printer longevity, HP provides the following:
Extended
Warranty
HP SupportPack covers the printer and all HP-supplied internal
components. It is a three-year warranty from the date of purchase.
HP SupportPack must be purchased by the customer within 90 days of
product purchase. Information on HP SupportPack is available by calling
your local HP FIRST number. (See the HP Customer Care pages at the
front of this user guide.)
Spare Parts
and
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be made
available for at least five years after production has stopped.
Consumables
Availability
Material Safety Data Sheet
The Toner Cartridge/Drum MSDS can be obtained by calling the U.S.
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Service Technology) at
(1) (800) 231-9300. Use Index number 7 for a listing of the Toner Cartridge/
Drum Material/Chemical Safety Data Sheets. Non-U.S. customers should refer
to the HP Customer Care pages at the front of this user guide for appropriate
phone numbers and information. For more information in the U.S., call
(1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http://
ljsupplies.com/planetpartners
Material Safety Data Sheet
Appendix E Regulatory Information
431
Environmental Conformity
Plastics
Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to
international standards, that enhance the ability to identify plastics
for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life. The plastics
used in the printer housing and chassis are technically recyclable.
Printer and Parts
Design for recycling has been incorporated into the printer and its
accessories. The number of materials has been kept to a minimum
while ensuring proper functionality and high product reliability.
Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate easily.
Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and
remove with common tools. High priority parts have been designed
to be accessed quickly for efficient disassembly and repair. Plastic
parts have been primarily designed in two colors to enhance
recycling options. A few small parts are colored specifically to
highlight customer access points.
HP disposes of returned products in an environmentally sound
manner. Many of the functional parts are recovered, tested, and
reused as fully-warrantied service parts. Used printer parts are not
placed into new product manufacturing. The remainder of the
product parts are recycled, if possible. For product take-back
information, contact your local HP Sales and Service Office
(page 295).
Environmental Conformity
Appendix E Regulatory Information
432
Paper
The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper
meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Paper Specifications Guide. The printer is suited for the use of
recycled paper according to DIN 19 309.
Acoustics
It is advisable to place printers with a sound power level of Lwad of
6.3 Bel (A) or higher into a separate or divided up room.
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer's Address:
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N, 8100 DN
C4214A, C4215A, C4216A
Model Number:
Declaration of Conformity
Appendix E Regulatory Information
433
Product Options:
ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
EMC:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
CISPR 22:1993 / EN 55022:1994 Class B 1
)
CISPR 22:1993 / EN 55022:1994 Class A 3
EN 50081-1:1992
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -
3 kV CD, 8 kV AD
3 V/m
1.0 kV Power Lines
0.5 kV Signal Lines
2
)
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-002, Issue 2
Declaration of Conformity
Appendix E Regulatory Information
434
AS / NZS 3548:1995
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer
Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) The product includes Local Area Network (LAN) options. When the Interface Cable is attached
to either of the IEEE 802.3 connectors, the printer meets the requirements of EN 55022 Class A.
Boise, Idaho USA
May 19, 1998
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia
Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia
Declaration of Conformity
Appendix E Regulatory Information
435
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or
Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE,
Herrenberger Straße 130, D-71034 Böblingen (Germany)
(FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,
PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone:
208-396-6000)
Declaration of Conformity
Appendix E Regulatory Information
436
Safety Statements
Laser Safety Statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and
Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products
manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products
marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a “Class 1” laser
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health
and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than
those specified in this user’s guide may result in exposure to hazardous
radiation.
Canadian DOC Regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
<<Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité
électromagnétiques. << CEM>>.>>
Safety Statements
Appendix E Regulatory Information
439
Laser Statement for Finland
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N, 8100 DN-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta
turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen
suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994)
mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa
altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan
användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för
laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
Safety Statements
Appendix E Regulatory Information
HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N, 8100 DN-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän
440
huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen
huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota
väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän
käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka
voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas
användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 765-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
Safety Statements
441
Index
Numerics
A
2000-sheet input tray, loading 92
5-bin mailbox with stapler 247
commands 420
accessories
hard disk 36
installing hard disk 404
options 34
mode 101
paper jams 192
problem solving 247
7-bin tabletop mailbox
commands 420
ordering 38
acoustic emissions 352
AutoCAD printer driver 61
mode 101
B
paper jams 192
problem solving 253
8-bin mailbox
bin
face-up 100
mailbox 101
standard 98
commands 420
mode 101
paper jams 192
problem solving 251
C
cable configuration 255
card stock 346
cleaning page 173
cleaning the printer 171
collation (mopying) 135
configuration
description of printer 30
442
configuration menu 375
configuration of MBM menu 383
configuration page
checking 277
custom-sized paper
loading 149
setting 132
printing 278
D
connectivity 29
control panel
keys 50
layout 48
Declaration of Conformity 432
default setting, restoring 390
dimensions of printer 348
DIMMs
lights 49
about 26
messages 198
installing 397
printing a menu map 53, 281
control panel menus
about 52
verifying 400
directory page 284
DocWise 72
configuration menu 375
configuration of MBM 383
EIO menu (8100N/8100DN) 387
I/O menu 384
information menu 358
paper handling menu 360
print quality menu 366
printing a menu map 53
printing menu 369
private/stored jobs menu 357
quick copy jobs menu 356
resets menu 390
dual in-line memory module
See DIMMs
duplexer
paper jams 187
problem solving 257
duplexing 110
E
EIO
installing 404
slots 29
EIO Menu (8100N/8100DN) 387
EMI statement (Korea) 438
customer support 3
443
envelope feeder
H
clearing paper jams 185
problem solving 258
size setting 360
type setting 360
envelope specifications 343
envelopes
hard disk 36
installing 404
problem solving 259
heavy paper 346
help
printer driver 70
wrinkles 226
using online 199
HP Fast InfraRed Connect
about 159
problem solving 264
HP LaserJet Resource Manager 82
HP support services 3
HP TonerGauge 167
humidity, operating environment 353
environmental product stewardship 426
environmental specifications 351
error messages 198
escape characters, entering 410
escape sequences
combining 409
event log 285
F
I
face-up bin 100
I/O buffering 403
I/O menu 384
information menu 358
infrared
printing with 159
problem solving 264
installing software
Windows 3.1x 65
Windows 9x and NT 4.0 64
FCC statement 425
file directory page 284
Finland laser statement 439
5-bin mailbox with stapler 247
fonts
number included with printer 27
printing list 282
FontSmart 73
fusing mode, variable 146
444
J
maintenance
jam recovery 381
JetAdmin
about 79
cleaning page 173
cleaning the printer 171
kit, ordering 46
installing 57
JetDirect EIO 271
JetSend, installing 74
manual feed 143
mass storage
installing 404
material safety data sheet 430
media
L
labels, specifications 341
laser statement for Finland 439
LaserJet Resource Manager 82
LEDs, status interpretation 54
letterhead paper, loading 122
See paper
memory
about 26
adjusting settings 401
allocated to languages 401
determining requirements 395
expandable 353
M
Macintosh
I/O buffering 403
LaserJet Utility 77, 81
LaserWriter 8 driver 76
PPDs 76, 269
printer driver 59
problem solving 267
software 67, 76
mailbox
installing 397
maximum configuration 399
resource saving 401
verifying installation 400
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 26
menu map, printing 53, 281
messages 198
operating modes 101
mailbox mode 422
mopying
See also printer collation 135
multiple pages on one sheet 140
445
N
loading
network problem solving 262
network software
about 78
installing 66
JetAdmin 57, 79
n-up printing 140
tray 1 84
tray 2 and 3 88
tray 4 (2000-sheet) 92
tray 4 and 5 (2x500-sheet) 88
multiple pages on one sheet 140
output
face-up bin 100
O
options 101
online help, using 199
options 34
OS/2 printer drivers 61
output bin
standard bin 98
prepunched 122
printing special 122
selecting by size and type 144
selecting output location 96
source 84
selecting 96
P
paper
weight equivalence table 338
See also Tray
custom or heavy stock 132
different first page 138
letterhead or preprinted, loading 122
paper handling
menu 360
options 28
446
paper jams
parts and locations 32
PCL fonts, selecting 411
PCL printer commands 412
PostScript Level 2 emulation
See PS
5-bin mailbox with stapler 192
7-bin tabletop mailbox 192
8-bin mailbox 192
clearing 176
duplexer 187
power
envelope feeder 185
fuser area or left door 191
output areas 190
repeated 196
right door 179
top cover area 189
tray 1 178
consumption 351
power save mode 351
requirements 352
PPDs, Macintosh 269
preprinted paper, loading 122
prepunched paper, loading 122
print quality menu 366
print quality problem solving 221
print servers 29
tray 2 and 3 180
tray 4 183
tray 4 and 5 (2x500-sheet) 181
paper specifications 328– 347
card stock or heavy paper 346
envelopes 343
printer
configuration 30
features 26
parts location 32
labels 341
specifications 348
transparencies 342
printer collation (mopying) 135
447
printer driver
problem solving
about 59
about 174
accessing windows drivers 68
AutoCAD 61
choosing 69
different first page 138
features 135
help 70
checklist 227
common problems 232
HP Fast InfraRed Connect 264
Macintosh 267
network and I/O port 262
paper jam locations 177
paper jams 176
included 60
Macintosh 59
print quality 221
Macintosh PPDs 269
multiple pages on one sheet 140
obtaining most recent 61
OS/2 and WordPerfect 5.1 61
PPDs 60
PS errors 260
repeating paper jams 196
PS
Q
RIP ONCE 136
quick copy jobs menu 356
saving setup information 136
selecting paper by size and type 144
watermark 137
R
resets menu 390
printer language
about 27
allocating memory 401
printing menu 369
private/stored jobs menu 357
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 26
Resource Manager, HP LaserJet 82
RIP ONCE
about 136
hard disk 44
448
S
stacker mode 422
sales and service offices 295
separator mode 423
service and support information 286
7-bin tabletop mailbox
problem solving 253
size of printer 348
software
stapler, clearing jams 194
supplies, ordering 38
support services 3
T
temperature, operating environment 353
toner cartridge
about 56
Apple LaserWriter 8 driver 76
DocWise 72
checking toner level 166
life expectancy 166
limited warranty 290
managing 165
FontSmart 73
installing network 66
JetAdmin 79
JetSend 74
printing with low toner 168
resetting HP TonerGauge 167
storage 165
LaserJet Resource Manager 82
LaserJet Utility 77, 81
Macintosh 67, 76
network 78
obtaining most recent 61
PPDs 60
ToolBox 71
transparency, specifications 342
Tray 1
clearing paper jams 178
customizing (modes) 141
loading 84
ToolBox 71
manual feed 143
problem solving 242
Tray 2 and 3
loading 88
paper jam 180
typical or custom install 63
Web JetAdmin 78
Windows 3.1x 65
Windows 9x and NT 4.0 64
speed, printing 353
problem solving 243
449
Tray 4 (2000-sheet)
loading 92
VCCI statement (Japan) 437
paper jams 183
W
problem solving 244
Tray 4 and 5 (2x500-sheet)
loading 88
warranty statement 287
watermark 137
Web JetAdmin 78
paper jams 181
problem solving 243
troubleshooting
See problem solving
2000-sheet input tray, loading 92
two-sided printing 110
web servers, supported 78
weight of printer 350
Windows 3.1x, installing software 65
Windows 9x and NT 4.0, installing software 64
WordPerfect 5.1 printer driver 61
World Wide Web support 3
wrinkled envelopes 226
V
variable fusing mode 146
|
